letrungkien.edu.vnletrungkien.edu.vn/uploads/laws/tieng-anh-on-tap-thi... · Web viewPHONETICS...

178
TRƯỜNG THPT LÊ TRUNG KIÊN T: NGOẠI NG ĐỀ CƯƠNG ÔN THI THPT QUỐC GIA MÔN TIẾNG ANH (Lưu hành nội bộ) Năm học 2019-2020 0

Transcript of letrungkien.edu.vnletrungkien.edu.vn/uploads/laws/tieng-anh-on-tap-thi... · Web viewPHONETICS...

Page 1: letrungkien.edu.vnletrungkien.edu.vn/uploads/laws/tieng-anh-on-tap-thi... · Web viewPHONETICS NGỮ ÂM * PHẦN I: LÝ THUYẾT. A. PRONUNCIATION. I. NGUYÊN ÂM. 1. Giới thiệu

TRƯỜNG THPT LÊ TRUNG KIÊNTÔ: NGOAI NGƯ

ĐỀ CƯƠNGÔN THI THPT QUỐC GIA MÔN

TIẾNG ANH(Lưu hành nội bộ)

Năm học 2019-2020

Năm học: 2017-2018

0

Page 2: letrungkien.edu.vnletrungkien.edu.vn/uploads/laws/tieng-anh-on-tap-thi... · Web viewPHONETICS NGỮ ÂM * PHẦN I: LÝ THUYẾT. A. PRONUNCIATION. I. NGUYÊN ÂM. 1. Giới thiệu

CHUYÊN ĐỀ 1 (CÔ TRÂM)

PHONETICSNGƯ ÂM

* PHẦN I: LÝ THUYẾT

A. PRONUNCIATION

I. NGUYÊN ÂM

1. Giới thiệu về nguyên âm (The vowel sounds):

* 20 vowels in the English language:

- The 12 pure vowels: /i - i:/, /e - æ/, /Ɔ - Ɔ:/, / - a:/, /u- u:/, /ә - з:/.

- The 8 diphthongs: /ei - ai - Ɔi/, /au - әu/, /iә - eә - uә /

* Triphthongs and other vowel sequences:

- /aiә /: fire, hire, tyre, buyer, wire, flyer, iron,…

- /әuә /: slower, lower, grower, sower, mower,…

- /auә /: flower, power, tower, shower, sour, flour,…

- /eiә /: greyer, player, layer, payer, prayer,…

- /Ɔiә /: employer, destroyer, royal, loyal, annoyance,…

2. Nguyên âm đơn và cách phát âm của 5 chữ cái (A, E, I, O, U).

3. Nguyên âm đôi và cách phát âm:

/ai/, /ei/, /Ɔi/, /au/, /əu/, /iə/, /eə/, /uə/

4. Từ đồng dạng (Homographs)

II. PHỤ ÂM

1. Giới thiệu về phụ âm (The consonants sounds): 24 consonants in English

devided into voiceless and voiced consonants and are shown below:

a. Voiceless consonants: /p/, /f/, //, /t/, /s/, /∫/, /t∫/, /k/, /h/.

b. Voiced consonants: /b/, /v/, /ð/, /d/, /z/, /Ʒ/, /dƷ/, /g/, /l/, /m/, /n/, /ŋ/, /r/, /w/, /j/.

c. The consonant clusters:

2. Cách phát âm của một số phụ âm:

a. Chữ C có thể được đọc thành 4 âm: /s/, /k/, /ʃ/, /tʃ/ b. Chữ D có thể được đọc thành 2 âm: /g/, /dʒ/

c. Chữ G có thể được đọc thành: /d/, /dʒ /, /ʒ/.

d. Chữ ‘n’ được phát âm là /n/ và /ŋ/

e. Chữ ‘qu’ được phát âm là /kw/ và /k/

f. Chữ ‘s’ được phát âm là /s/, /ʃ/, /ʒ/ và /z/

Cách phát âm mẫu tự “s” ở dạng động từ ngôi thứ ba số ít, danh từ số nhiều và sở hữu cách:

* trường hợp 1: ‘s’ được phát âm là /s/

Âm đứng

trước 's'

Danh từ số nhiều

(Plural form)

Động từ ngôi thứ 3 số ít

(3rd singular V)

Sở hữu cách

(Possessives)

Cách đọc kí tự

's'

1

Page 3: letrungkien.edu.vnletrungkien.edu.vn/uploads/laws/tieng-anh-on-tap-thi... · Web viewPHONETICS NGỮ ÂM * PHẦN I: LÝ THUYẾT. A. PRONUNCIATION. I. NGUYÊN ÂM. 1. Giới thiệu

/p/ maps capes stops

/t/ cats,

mates

beats,

calculates

Janet' s /s/

/k/ books, lakes Attacks, makes Frank' s

/f/ paragraphs,

laughs, chiefs, safes

photographs

laughs

Cliff' s

/θ/ months

photographs

bathes

photographs

Gareth' s

* trường hợp 2: ‘es’ được phát âm là /iz/:

- Nếu danh từ số ít có tận cùng là: s, x, ch, sh, -ce, -es,-ge

Ngoại lệ: những danh từ gốc Hy Lạp tận cùng bằng ch chỉ thêm 's' và đọc là /ks/.

Eg: a monarch /mɔ'nək/ (vua) monarchs /mɔ 'nəks/

Âm đứng

trước 's/es'

Danh từ số nhiều

(Plural form)

Động từ ngôi thứ 3 số ít

(3rd singular V)

Sở hữu cách

(Possessives)

Cách đọc kí tự

's/es'

/s/ glasses

sentences

kisses

sentences

Bruce's

/ks/ Boxes Mixes Felix's

/ʧ/ Churches Teaches Mrs. Gooch's /iz/

/ʃ/ Wishes Washes Trish's

/ʒ/ Garages massages Solange's

/dʒ/ Pages stages Gorge's

/z/ bruises rise Rose's

* trường hợp 3: ‘s’ được phát âm là /z/: Các trường hợp còn lại:

Âm đứng

trước 's'

Danh từ số nhiều

(Plural form)

Động từ ngôi thứ 3 số ít

(3rd singular V)

Sở hữu cách

(Possessives)

Cách đọc kí tự

's'

/b/ Cubs robs Bob' s

/v/ Caves lives Olive' s

/ð/ clothes breathes Smith' s

/d/ Beds reads Donald' s

/g/ Eggs digs Peg' s /z/

/l/ Hills fills Daniel's

/m/ rooms comes Tom's

/n/ Pens learns Jane's

/ŋ/ Rings brings King's

2

Page 4: letrungkien.edu.vnletrungkien.edu.vn/uploads/laws/tieng-anh-on-tap-thi... · Web viewPHONETICS NGỮ ÂM * PHẦN I: LÝ THUYẾT. A. PRONUNCIATION. I. NGUYÊN ÂM. 1. Giới thiệu

/əu/ potatoes goes Jo's

/ei/ Days plays Clay's

/eə/ Hairs wears Clare's

Note: Cách đọc tận cùng “s” như trên còn có thể áp dụng cho:

- Danh từ số ít có tận cùng là 's': physics /'fiziks/, series /'siəriz/.

- Thể giản lược: What's /wɔts/ Phong doing?

He's /hi:z/ reading.

- Tận cùng “s” trong đuôi của tính từ như: -ous, -ious: được đọc là /s/.

g. Chữ ‘t’ được phát âm là /t/, /tʃ/, /ʃ/ và /ʒ/

h. Chữ 'x' có thể được phát âm là /ks/, /gz/, /kʃ/, /z/

j. Chữ 'z' có thể được phát âm là /s/ trong những từ đặc biệt:

k. Chữ 'th' có thể được phát âm là /θ/ và /ð/.

‘th’ câm ở các từ sau:

asthma /æsmə/ (n): bệnh hen suyễn; isthmus /isməs/ (n): eo đất

Chữ 'th' có thể được phát âm là /ð/ hay /θ/: còn phụ thuộc vào từ loại hoặc nghĩa của chúng.

North /nɔ:θ/ (n) Northern /'nɔ: ðən/ adj)

South/auθ/ (n) Southern /sΛðən/

cloth /klɔθ/ clothe /kləuð; klɔuð/(v)

bath/bɑ:θ ; bæθ/ (n) bathe /beið/

teeth/ti:θ/ (n) teethe /ti:ð/ (v)

.............

l. Chữ 'sh' được phát âm là /ʃ/: trong mọi trường hợp:

m. Chữ 'gh' & 'ph'

n. Chữ 'ch' được phát âm là /ʧ/, /k/, /ʃ/. 3. Những âm câm.

4. Cách phát âm “ed”:

a.. Cách phát âm đuôi “ed” của những động từ có quy tắc ở dạng quá khứ đơn:

- “ed” /id/: Nếu động từ có tận cùng bằng các âm /t/ hay /d/.

eg. needed, wanted, decided, started ...

- 'ed' /t/: Nếu động từ có tận cùng bằng 8 âm sau:

/f/ (trong các chữ: f, fe, gh, ph),

/p/ (trong chữ p),

/k/ (trong chữ k),

/ks/ (trong chữ x),

/s/ (trong chữ s, ce),

/tʃ/ (trong chữ ch),

/ʃ/ (trong chữ sh),

3

Page 5: letrungkien.edu.vnletrungkien.edu.vn/uploads/laws/tieng-anh-on-tap-thi... · Web viewPHONETICS NGỮ ÂM * PHẦN I: LÝ THUYẾT. A. PRONUNCIATION. I. NGUYÊN ÂM. 1. Giới thiệu

/ θ/ (trong chữ th)

b. Cách phát âm các tính từ tận cùng bằng ‘ed’:

II. STRESS

1. Giới thiệu về trọng âm

Trọng âm là sự phát âm của một từ hoặc một âm tiết với nhiều lực hơn so với các từ hoặc các

âm tiết xung quanh. Một từ hoặc âm tiêt được nhấn trọng âm được phát âm bằng cách sử dụng nhiều

khí từ phổi hơn’ (Richard, J. C et al. 1992:355).

Các âm tiết mang trọng âm được phát âm mạnh hơn các âm tiết không mang trọng âm (được

phát âm nhẹ hơn hoặc ngắn hơn hoặc đôi khi được đọc rút gọn).

Ta dùng kí hiệu /'/ đặt ở đầu âm tiết có trọng âm chính. Trong những từ nhiều âm tiết có trọng

âm chính và trọng âm phụ và được biểu thị /,/.

Eg: father/'fɑ:ðə/, indication/,indi'kei∫n/, representative/,repri'zentətiv/,….

2. Một số quy tắc đánh trọng âm:

Trọng âm chỉ rơi vào những âm tiết mạnh (âm tiết chứa nguyên âm mạnh, nguyên âm đôi

hoặc nguyên âm dài). Âm tiết yếu không nhận trọng âm.

a. Trọng âm ở từ có 2 âm tiết :

- Đa số động từ có 2 âm tiết thì âm tiết thứ 2 nhận trọng âm chính :

Eg: es/cape, for/get, be/gin, ac/cept ....

Tuy nhiên có một số động từ ngoại lệ : /promise, /answer, /enter, /listen, /offer, /happen, /open.

- Đa số danh từ và tính từ 2 âm tiết có trọng âm chính rơi và âm tiết thứ nhất:

Eg: /butcher, /standard, /busy, /handsome ....

Ngoại lệ: ma/chine, mis/take, a/lone, a/ware,...

- Một số từ vừa là danh từ, vừa là động từ có trọng âm chính không đổi:

ad/vice/ ad/vise, /visit, re/ply, tra/vel, /promise, /picture;

- Còn lại đa số các từ có 2 âm tiết mà có 2 chức năng thì trọng âm thay đổi theo chức năng của từ: /record(noun)/ re/cord (verb), /present(noun)/ pre/sent (verb), /desert(noun)/ de/sert(verb) ....

b. Những trường hợp khác:

- Các từ có tận cùng bằng các hậu tố sau có trọng âm chính rơi vào âm tiết đứng ngay trước hậu tố

đó.

-tion : pro/tection. compu/tation ...

- Các từ có tận cùng bằng các hậu tố sau có trọng âm rơi vào âm tiết cách hậu tố đó 1 âm tiết.

-ate : con/siderate, /fortunate ...

Ngoại lệ : docu/mentary, ele/mentary, supple/mentary, extra/ordinary.

- Những hậu tố sau thường được nhận trọng âm chính.

-ee : de/gree, refe/ree... Ngoại lệ : com/mittee, /coffee

- Một số tiền tố và hậu tố khi thêm vào không làm thay đổi trọng âm chính của từ đó.

a. Tiền tố :

4

Page 6: letrungkien.edu.vnletrungkien.edu.vn/uploads/laws/tieng-anh-on-tap-thi... · Web viewPHONETICS NGỮ ÂM * PHẦN I: LÝ THUYẾT. A. PRONUNCIATION. I. NGUYÊN ÂM. 1. Giới thiệu

* un- : /healthy un/healthy, im/portant unim/portant …

Ngoại lệ : /understatement, /undergrowth, /underground, /underpants

b. Hậu tố :

-ful : / beauty / beautiful, /wonder /wonderful …

- Trọng âm ở các từ chỉ số đếm:

thir’teen, ‘thirty / four’teen, ‘forty / fif’teen, ‘fifty ….

Tuy nhiên mẫu trọng âm này có thể thay đổi khi từ chỉ số đếm xuất hiện ở trong câu.

Ví dụ: khi nó đứng trước danh từ thì trọng âm của nó là : ‘nineteen people ...

- Trọng âm ở các từ ghép

Hầu hết danh từ ghép và tính từ ghép có trọng âm chính rơi vào âm tiết đầu tiên.

/dishwasher, /filmmaker, /typewriter, /praiseworthy, /waterproof, /lightning-fast …

Ngoại lệ : duty-/free, snow -/white

Tính từ ghép có từ đầu tiên là tính từ hoặc trạng từ thì trọng âm chính rơi vào từ thứ 2, tận cùng là

động từ phân từ 2.

Eg: well-/done, well-/informed, short-/sighted, bad-/tempered

Các trạng từ và động từ ghép có trọng âm chính rơi vào âm tiết thứ 2.

up/stairs, down/stairs, down-/grade, ill-/treat,…

- Trọng âm của các động từ thành ngữ (Phrasal verbs):

Nếu cụm động từ thành ngữ có chức năng là một danh từ trọng âm rơi vào âm tiết thứ nhất.

Eg: 'setup (n): sự thu xếp 'upset (n): sự quấy rầy

'holdup (n): vụ cướp 'lookout (n) người xem

'checkout (n): việc thanh toán để rời (Khách sạn,..)

etc……

Nếu cụm động từ thành ngữ có chức năng là một động từ trọng âm rơi vào âm tiết thứ hai.

Eg: to set 'up: thu xếp to up 'set: làm thất vọng,

to hold 'up: cầm, giữ to check 'out: trả phòng

to look 'out: canh chừng

* Bảng tóm lược cách dùng trọn âmSTRESS SUFFIX EXAMPLES EXCEPTIONS

ONE before

suffix

-ITY ability, curiosity, density, intensity terrify

-ETY anxiety, variety, society

-IC medical, physical, typical, tropical terrific

-ICAL amplify, modify, clarify

-IFY amplify, modify, clarify

-EFY rarefy, liquefy

-IA magnesia, malaria, insomnia

-IAL adverbial, editorial, crucial

-EAL cereal, venereal

5

Page 7: letrungkien.edu.vnletrungkien.edu.vn/uploads/laws/tieng-anh-on-tap-thi... · Web viewPHONETICS NGỮ ÂM * PHẦN I: LÝ THUYẾT. A. PRONUNCIATION. I. NGUYÊN ÂM. 1. Giới thiệu

-UAL actual, casual, gradual

-IBLE audible, impossible, possible

-TIONcommunication, complication,

invitation

-SION admission, dimension, supervision TElevision

-IONaccordion, legion, opinion,

religion

-IONAL dimensional, fractional, occasional

-IAN electrician, guardian, magician

-EAN Mediterranean, caesarean

-UAN gargantuan

-IUM aquarium, calcium

-IENT

-IENCE

-IENCY

efficient, impatient

experience, patience

sufficiency

-INAL criminal, nominal, seminal

-IOUS

-EOUS

-UOUS

obvious, glorious

spontaneous

ambiguous

-GRAPHY biography, telegraphy, geography

-LOGY analogy, geology, physiology

TWO

before

suffix

-ATE advocate, adequate, cultivate

-OUSmarvelous, mischievous,

dangerous

ambiDEXtrous, aMORphous, deSIrous,

diSAStrous, treMENdous, eNORMous,

intraVENous, moMENTous,

stuPENDous

-ENT

-ENCE

-ENCY

-ANT

-ANCE

-ANCY

accident, different

confidence

presidency

significant

ambulance

occupancy

conCURrent, conSIStent, conTINgent,

deTERgent, deTERrent, rePELlent,

ocCURrence, aBUNdant, inDIGnant,

alLOWance, apPEArance, asSIStance,

reLUCtance

-ARY actuary, February, ordinaryAnniVERsary, eleMENTary, inFIRmary,

suppleMENtary, peniTENtiary,

-ORY auditory, inventory adVIsory, comPULsory, satisFACtory

-TUDE attitude, gratitude, promptitude

-GRAPH autograph, homograph, telegraph

-GRAM diagram, telegram, kilogram

ON suffix -ADE lemonade, brigade, masquerade CENtigrade, EScapade, MARmalade,

RENegade, RETrograde

6

Page 8: letrungkien.edu.vnletrungkien.edu.vn/uploads/laws/tieng-anh-on-tap-thi... · Web viewPHONETICS NGỮ ÂM * PHẦN I: LÝ THUYẾT. A. PRONUNCIATION. I. NGUYÊN ÂM. 1. Giới thiệu

-AQUE

-IQUE

-IGUE

opaque

antique, critique, unique

fatigue, intrigue

-ESE Chinese, Japanese, bureaucratese

-ESQUE picturesque, grotesque, statuesque

-ETTE dinette, kitchenette, roomette

-IABLEclassifiable, electrifiable,

certifiable

-OON balloon, cartoon, dragoon, typhoon

-EE employee, referee, trainee, refugee comMITtee, FIligree, JUbilee, PEdigree

-OSIS diagnosis, psychosis, hypnosis metaMORphosis

-EER career, engineer, volunteer

-ITIS arthritis, bronchitis, appendicitis

FIRST

in two

suffixes

-MENTal

-MENTary

-IZable/ -ISable

-ARily

governmental, experimental

complementary, supplementary

advisable, realizable

temporarily, voluntarily

UNSTRESSED PREFIX

PREFIX EXAMPLES PREFIX EXAMPLES

A- accept, account, admit, advance EX- excuse, explain, except

BE- because, become, begin FOR- forget, forgive

COM- complete, command IN- include, indeed, instead, invite

CON- contain, control, convince OB- observe

DE- defeat, decide, defense PRE- pretend, prepare

DIS- desire, destroy, discuss PRO- provide

TO- today, tonight RE- remain, reply, report

SU- surprise, success, support PER- perform, perhaps

Các hậu tố dưới đây không làm thay đổi vị trí trọng âm.

-ale -al -er -hood -ish -less -ment -fy -wise-age -en -ful -ing -like -ly -ness -ous -y

* PHẦN II: BÀI TẬP TRẮC NGHIỆM (60 CÂU)

1. STRESSMark the letter A, B, C, or D to indicate the word with the main stress placed differently from that of

the others in each group.

A. adorable B. ability C. impossible D. entertainment

7

Page 9: letrungkien.edu.vnletrungkien.edu.vn/uploads/laws/tieng-anh-on-tap-thi... · Web viewPHONETICS NGỮ ÂM * PHẦN I: LÝ THUYẾT. A. PRONUNCIATION. I. NGUYÊN ÂM. 1. Giới thiệu

A. engineer B. corporate C. difficult D. different

A. popular B. position C. horrible D. positive

A. selfish B. correct C. purpose D. surface

A. permission B. computer C. million D. perfection

A. scholarship B. negative C. develop D. purposeful

A. ability B. acceptable C. education D. hilarious

A.document B. comedian C. perspective D. location

A. provide B. product C. promote D. profess

A. different B. regular C. achieving D. property

A. education B. community C. development D. unbreakable

A. politics B. deposit C. conception D. occasion

A. prepare B. repeat C. purpose D. police

A. preface B. famous C. forget D. childish

A. cartoon B. western C. teacher D. theater

A. Brazil B. Iraq C. Norway D. Japan

A. scientific B. ability C. experience D. material

A. complain B. luggage C. improve D. forgive

A. offensive B. delicious C. dangerous D. religious

A. develop B. adjective C. generous D. popular

A. beautiful B. important C. delicious D. exciting

A. element B. regular C. believing D. policy

A. punctual B. tolerant C. utterance D. occurrence

A. expensive B. sensitive C. negative D. sociable

A. education B. development C. economic D. preparation

A. attend B. option C. percent D. become

A. literature B. entertainment C. recreation D. information

A. attractive B. perception C. cultural D. expensive

A. chocolate B. structural C. important D. national

A. cinema B. position C. family D. popular

2. PRONUNCIATION

Mark the letter A, B, C, or D to indicate the word that has its underlined part pronounced differently

from that of the other words.

1. A) nurse B) films C) stops D) coughs2. A) artificial B) distance C) centre D) cells3. A) designer B) zoo C) Switzerland D) tables4. A) although B) width C) thump D) thank5. A) thought B) tough C) bought D) fought6. A) raised B) talked C) watched D) laughed

8

Page 10: letrungkien.edu.vnletrungkien.edu.vn/uploads/laws/tieng-anh-on-tap-thi... · Web viewPHONETICS NGỮ ÂM * PHẦN I: LÝ THUYẾT. A. PRONUNCIATION. I. NGUYÊN ÂM. 1. Giới thiệu

7. A) homeless B) done C) become D) month8. A) hidden B) minor C) written D) kitten9. A) many B) lamb C) handle D) camera10. A) there B) appear C) wear D) prepare11. A) occupy B) puppy C) ready D) study12. A) accident B) success C) accurate D) accept13. A) private B) irrigate C) guidance D) environment14. A) instruction B) shrub C) eruption D) supply15. A) necessarily B) mechanic C) exception D) apprentice16. A) basic B) erosion C) loose D) recycle17. A) worry B) infer C) dirtying D) fertilizer18. A) mile B) militant C) smile D) kind19. A) relaxed B) mounted C) collected D) needed20. A) picked B) considered C) stayed D) received21. A) women B) bench C) lend D) spend22. A) food B) good C) look D) blood23. A) property B) access C) possession D) American24. A) much B) number C) cut D) put25. A) particular B) park C) smart D) hard26. A) Africa B) access C) ache D) man27. A) cat B) certain C) cook D) Canadian28. A) respect B) send C) set D) then29. A) good B) book C) use D) sugar30. A) brain B) lamb C) comb D) climb

* PHẦN I I I : ĐÁP ÁN

1. STRESS

1. D 2. A 3. B 4. B 5. C 6. C 7. C 8. A 9. B 10. C

11. A 12. A 13. C 14. C 15. A 16. C 17. A 18. B 19. C 20. A

21. A 22. C 23. D 24. A 25. B 26. B 27. A 28. C 29. C 30. B

2. PRONUNCIATION

1. B 2. A 3. C 4. A 5. B 6. A 7. A 8. B 9. A 10. B

11. A 12. C 13. B 14. D 15. B 16. B 17. A 18. B 19. A 20. A

21. A 22. D 23. A 24. D 25. A 26. C 27. B 28. A 29. D 30. A

9

Page 11: letrungkien.edu.vnletrungkien.edu.vn/uploads/laws/tieng-anh-on-tap-thi... · Web viewPHONETICS NGỮ ÂM * PHẦN I: LÝ THUYẾT. A. PRONUNCIATION. I. NGUYÊN ÂM. 1. Giới thiệu

CHUYÊN ĐỀ 2 (THẦY ĐIỀN)

TENSES(CÁC THÌ)

* PHẦN I: LÝ THUYẾT

1. Hiện tại đơn (Simple present) S + V1/(s/es) S + don’t / doesn’t + V1 Wh- + do / does + S + V1…?

- Dùng để chỉ các hành động thói quen, mang tính chất lặp đi lặp lại.Ex: She usually gets up at 6 A.m.

- Dùng để chỉ các sự kiện và sự thật hiển nhiên, chân lý.Ex:Water freezes at 0 degree centigrade.

- hành động trong tương lai được đưa vào chương trình, kế hoạch.Ex: The new school year begins on September 5th. * Dấu hiệu nhận biết:

every____ (every day, every week, every night,…..) often, sometimes, usually, always, frequently, as a rule…… twice a week, once a week….

2. Hiện tại tiếp diễn (Present progressive) S + am / is / are + V-ing S + am / is are + not + V-ing Wh- + am / is / are + S + V-ing…?

- Dùng để chỉ một hành động đang diễn ra trong lúc nói.Ex: Listen! The bird is singing.

I am studying now.- Một hành động dự kiến trong tương lai gần đã được sắp xếp xong.

Ex: They are playing tennis next week.- Với chữ always đế diễn tả một hành động thường lặp lại thường xuyên, hay một lời phàn

nàn…Ex: He is always taking exams. He is always studying.

- Hai hành động xảy ra song song ở hiện tạiEx: She is cooking dinner while her husband is watching T.V now. - Hành dộng có tính chất tạm thờiEx: I often go to work by bus but today I am going by motorbike.* Dấu hiệu nhận biết:

- Câu bắt đầu bằng một mệnh lệnh như: Listen!, Look!, Pay attention!, Keep silent! Be quiet!....

hoặc các cụm từ: now, right now, at the moment, at the present, today, while, next…(chỉ một dự định)3. Hiện tại hoàn thành ( Present perfect) :

S + have / has + V3/-edS + haven’t / hasn’t + V3/-edWh- + have / has + S + V3/-ed…?

* Cách dùng:- Một hành động đã xảy ra trong quá khứ nhưng không có thời gian xác định.

Ex: I haven’t met him before.- Một hành động vừa mới xảy ra, hay vừa mới hoàn tất.

10

Page 12: letrungkien.edu.vnletrungkien.edu.vn/uploads/laws/tieng-anh-on-tap-thi... · Web viewPHONETICS NGỮ ÂM * PHẦN I: LÝ THUYẾT. A. PRONUNCIATION. I. NGUYÊN ÂM. 1. Giới thiệu

Ex: She has just gone out.- Một hành động xảy ra trong quá khứ, kéo dài đến hiện tại và có thể tiếp tục trong tương

lai.Ex: My father has worked in this company for 10 years.

* Dấu hiệu nhận biết: never, ever, since, for, recently, lately, just, already, so far, up to now, up to the present, until now, before (trước đây), yet, (dùng trong câu phủ định và câu hỏi), many times, several times, how long, this is the first time / the second time, four times , five times…4. Quá khứ đơn ( Simple Past)

S + V2/-ed S + didn’t + V1 Wh- + did + S + V1…?* Cách dùng:

- Một hành động đã xảy ra và đã hoàn tất ở thời gian xác định trong quá khứ.Ex: We bought this car two years ago.

- Một thói quen trong quá khứ.Ex: When I was young, I often went swimming with my friends in this river.

- Một chuỗi hành động trong quá khứEx: I entered the room, turned on the light, went to the kitchen and had dinner.* Dấu hiệu nhận biết: yesterday ________ ( yesterday morning, yesterday afternoon,…….)

last _______ ( last year, last night, last week, last month….)_______ ago ( two years ago, many months ago, ten minutes ago….)

in + year in the past ( một năm nào đó trong quá khứ: in 1999, in 2001…)

5. Quá khứ tiếp diễn ( Past continuous) : S + was / were + V-ing

S + was / were + not + V-ing Wh- + was / were + S + V-ing…?* Cách dùng:

- Một hành động đang diễn ra tại một thời điểm xác định trong quá khứ.Ex: What were you doing at 7 pm yesterday?

- Một hành động đang xảy ra trong quá khứ thì một hành động khác xảy ra cắt ngang.Ex: Mai was watching TV when I came home.

When they were having dinner, she entered their room.- Hai hành động xảy ra song song trong quá khứ.

Ex:While her mother was cooking dinner, her father was reading books.* Dấu hiệu nhận biết:

At + giờ + thời gian trong quá khứAt this/ that time + thời gian trong quá khứ

Khi hai mệnh đề nối với nhau bằng chữ when hoặc while… Hai hành động xảy ra trong quá khứ: hành động ngắn dùng quá khứ đơn; hành động dài dùng quá khứ tiếp diễn.6. Quá khứ hoàn thành ( Past perfect)

S + had + V3/-edS + hadn’t + V3/-edWh- + had + S + V3/-ed…?

* Cách dùng:- Một hành động xảy ra trước một hành động khác trong quá khứ.

Ex: He had left the house before she came.- Một hành động xảy ra trước một thời điểm xác định trong quá khứ.

Ex: We had had lunch by two o’clock yesterday.By the age of 25, he had written two famous novels.

11

Page 13: letrungkien.edu.vnletrungkien.edu.vn/uploads/laws/tieng-anh-on-tap-thi... · Web viewPHONETICS NGỮ ÂM * PHẦN I: LÝ THUYẾT. A. PRONUNCIATION. I. NGUYÊN ÂM. 1. Giới thiệu

* Dấu hiệu nhận biết: before, after, when, by the time, as soon as, as…., by + thời gian trong quá khứ

7. Tương lai đơn ( Simple future) : S + will / shall + V1S + won’t / shan’t + V1Wh- + will + S + V1…?

* Cách dùng:- Một hành động có thể, hay có lẽ xảy ra trong tương lai.

Ex: - They will come here next week. - The football match will be over at 7 o’clock.

- Một lời đề nghị hay một yêu cầu (ở thể nghi vấn)Ex: Will you go to the cinema with me?

- Một quyết định đưa ra vào thời điểm nóiEx: The bag is very heavy. – I’ll help you.* Dấu hiệu nhận biết:

next… ( next week, next month, …..), someday, tomorrow, soon, in + năm trong tương lai…at + thời giờ trong tương lai* Chú ý: Để diễn tả một hành động có dụ định hay một dự đoán trong tương lai, ta có thể dùng BE GOING TO + V1: S + am / is / are + going to + V1

Ex: - Where are you going to spend your summer holiday?- Look at those clouds! It is going to rain.

8. Tương lai hoàn thành ( Future perfect) : S + will have + V3/-edS + won’t have + V3/-edWh- + will + S + have + V3/-ed…?

* Cách dùng: - Một hành động sẽ hoàn tất trước một thời điểm ở tương lai hay một hành động khác ở tương lai.

Ex: By lunch time, I will have typed five letters.* Dấu hiệu nhận biết: by + mốc thời gian, by the time, by then

BẢNG TÓM TẮC PHẦN SỬ DỤNG CÁC THÌ TRONG TIẾNG ANH

TENSES USE EXAMPLESSIMPLE PRESENT(HIỆN TẠI ĐƠN)

 Động từ “tobe”:S + am/ is / are + …S + am / is / are + not + …Am / Is / Are + S + …? Động từ thường:S + V1 / V(s/es)S + don’t/ doesn’t + V1Do / Does + S + V1 …?

- thói quen ở hiện tại- sự thật, chân lí.

- hành động trong tương lai được đưa vào chương trình, kế hoạch.- If sentence type 1

 * Dấu hiệu nhận biết:

- always, usually, often, sometimes, seldom, rarely, never, every, normally, regularly, occasionally, as a rule …

- She often goes to school late. - The sun rises in the east.- The next term starts on 5 May.- If I come there tomorrow, I’ll phone you.

 PRESENT

- hành động đang diễn ra vào lúc nói.- dự định sẽ thực hiện trong tương lai

- I can’t answer the phone. I’m having a bath.

12

Page 14: letrungkien.edu.vnletrungkien.edu.vn/uploads/laws/tieng-anh-on-tap-thi... · Web viewPHONETICS NGỮ ÂM * PHẦN I: LÝ THUYẾT. A. PRONUNCIATION. I. NGUYÊN ÂM. 1. Giới thiệu

PROGRESSIVE(HIỆN TẠI TIẾP DIỄN)

 S + am/is/are + V-ing S + am/ is/ are + not + V-ing Am / Is /Are + S + V-ing?

gần.- hành động có tính chất tạm thời. - Thường dùng tiếp theo câu đề nghị , mệnh lệnh

- hai hành động xảy ra song song kéo dài ở hiện tại

Dấu hiệu nhận biết:- at the moment, now, right now, at present

- Look!- Listen!- Be quiet!- Keep silent!

 * Note: một số động từ thường không dùng với thì tiếp diễn: like, dislike, hate, love, want, prefer, admire, believe, understand, remember, forget, know, belong, have, taste, smell, …

- She is going to the cinema tonight.

- He often goes to work by car, but today he is taking a bus.

- Be quiet! The baby is sleeping.

- My sister is playing badminton while my brother is playing football at the moment.

PRESENT PERFECT(HIỆN TẠI HOÀN

THÀNH) S + has / have + P.P S + has / have + not + P.P Has / Have + S + P.P?

- hành động bắt đầu trong quá khứ, kéo dài đến hiện tại và có thể tiếp tục trong tương lai.- hành động xảy ra và chấm dứt trong quá khứ không rõ thời gian.- hành động xảy ra trong quá khứ mà kết quả còn lưu lại ở hiện tại.- hành động vừa mới xảy ra. - Hành động được lặp đi lặp lại nhiều lần trong quá khứ * Dấu hiệu nhận biết:- lately, recently (gần đây)- so far, up to now, up to the present (cho tới bây giờ)- in the past (ten) years (trong mười năm qua)- in the last (years) (những năm gần đây)- all my / his / her / their … life- already, ever, never, just, yet, for, since.- how long …- this is the first time/second time…- many times / several times …

- I have learnt English for five years.

- Tom has finished his homework. He is going to school.

- I haven’t found the keys yet. I cannot enter the house.

- She has just received a letter from her father.

PRESENT PERFECT PROGRESSIVE

(HIỆN TẠI HOÀN THÀNH TIẾP DIỄN)

S + has / have + been + V-ing 

S + has / have + not + been + V-ing

- nhấn mạnh tính liên tục của một hành động bắt đầu trong quá khứ, kéo dài đến hiện tại và có thể tiếp tục trong tương lai-  

- We have been waitingfor the bus for an hour.

- They’ve been working in the garden since 3 o’clock.

-

13

Page 15: letrungkien.edu.vnletrungkien.edu.vn/uploads/laws/tieng-anh-on-tap-thi... · Web viewPHONETICS NGỮ ÂM * PHẦN I: LÝ THUYẾT. A. PRONUNCIATION. I. NGUYÊN ÂM. 1. Giới thiệu

 Has / Have + S + been + V-ing …?

SIMPLE PAST(QUÁ KHỨ ĐƠN)

 Động từ “tobe”:S + / were/ was + …S + wasn’t / weren’t + …Was / Were + S + …? Động từ thường:S + V2 / V-edS + didn’t + V1Did + S + V1 ….?

- hành động xảy ra và chấm dứt ở một thời điểm xác định trong quá khứ.- kể lại một chuỗi hành động xảy ra liên tục trong quá khứ. - một thói quen trong quá khứ. * Dấu hiệu nhận biết:

- yesterday, last week, last month, …ago, in 1990, in the past, …

- She went to London last year.- The man came to the door, unlocked it, entered the room, went to the bed and lay down on it.

- When we were students, we often went on a picnic every weekend.

PAST PROGRESSIVE(QUÁ KHỨ TIẾP DIỄN)

 S + was / were + V-ing S + was / were + not + V-ing Was / Were + S + V-ing…?

- hành động đang xảy ra tại một thời điểm xác định trong quá khứ- hai hành động cùng xảy ra đồng thời trong quá khứ-diễn tả một hành động đang xảy ra thì một hành động khác xen vào. ( hành động đang xảy ra được dùng ở quá khứ tiếp diễn , còn hành động xen vào được dùng ở quá khứ đơn)* Dấu hiệu nhận biết:

- at that time, at (9 o’clock) last night, at this time (last week), in the summer, during the summer, all day, all week, all month, …

- He was doinghis homework at 8 o’clock last night. - The children were playing football while their mother was cooking the meal.

When we were having dinner, the light went out.

- We were watching TV all the evening last Sunday.

PAST PERFECT(QUÁ KHỨ HOÀN

THÀNH S + had + P.P S + hadn’t + P.P Had + S + P.P …?

- hành động xảy ra trước hành động khác hoặc trước một thời điểm trong quá khứ* Dấu hiệu nhận biết:

- already, ever, never, before, , by the time, after, when, ….

- When I arrived at the party, they had already left.

.- He had read that book many times before he gave it to you.

PAST PERFECT PROGRESSIVE

(QUÁ KHỨ HOÀN THÀNH TIẾP DIỄN)

S + had + been + V-ing S + hadn’t + been + V-ing Had + S + been + V-ing …?

- diễn tả một hành động quá khứ xảy ra một khoảng thời gian, thì hành động quá khứ thứ hai xuất hiện ( khoảng thời gian thường được nêu rõ trong câu)* Dấu hiệu nhận biết:

, when, for, since, ….

- When she arrived, I had been waitingfor two hours.

SIMPLE FUTURE(TƯƠNG LAI ĐƠN)

 S + will / shall + V(bare- inf)

- hành động sẽ xảy ra trong tương lai- một quyết định được đưa ra vào lúc nói- một đề nghị hoặc lời hứa- một lời đe dọa  

- He will come back tomorrow.- The phone is ringing. I will answer it.

- I promise. I won’t tell anyone 14

Page 16: letrungkien.edu.vnletrungkien.edu.vn/uploads/laws/tieng-anh-on-tap-thi... · Web viewPHONETICS NGỮ ÂM * PHẦN I: LÝ THUYẾT. A. PRONUNCIATION. I. NGUYÊN ÂM. 1. Giới thiệu

 S + will / shall + not + V(bare- inf)         Will / Shall + S + V(bare-inf) …?

* Dấu hiệu nhận biết:

- tomorrow, next, in 2012, ….- I think / guess- I am sure / I am not sure

about your plan.

- I will tell your mother if you do that again.

TƯƠNG LAI GẦNS + am/ is /are + going to + V ( bare –inf)Lưu ý cách dùng của Be going to + V1- diễn tả một dự định đã được sắp đặt trướcEx: She is going to buy a new computer. (She has saved for a year)- diễn tả một dự đoán có căn cứEx: The sky is absolutely dark. It is going to rain.

FUTURE PROGRESSIVE

(TƯƠNG LAI TIẾP DIỄN)

 S + will / shall + be + V-ing S + will / shall + be + V-ing Will / Shall + S + be + V-ing…?

- hành động sẽ đang xảy ra tại một thời điểm trong tương lai- hai hành động sẽ xảy ra đồng thời trong tương lai- nhấn mạnh tính liên tục của hành động từ lúc sẽ bắt đầu và kết thúc trong một khoảng thời gian nhất định trong tương lai  * Dấu hiệu nhận biết:

- at 9 o’clock tonight, at this time tomorrow, at this time next week / month / year,…

- At 7 o’clock tonight, we will be watchingthe news.

- I will be cooking dinner while my daughter will be cleaning the floor.

- They will be working all this afternoon.

FUTURE PERFECT(TƯƠNG LAI HOÀN

THÀNH) S + will /shall + have + P.P S + won’t / shan’t + have + P.P Will / Shall + S + have + P.P ….?

- hành động sẽ hoàn thành trước một thời điểm trong tương lai- hành động sẽ hoàn thành trước một hành động, sự việc khác trong tương lai  * Dấu hiệu nhận biết:

- when, before, by, by the time, …

- I will have finishedmy homework by 9 p.m.

- I will have finished my homework before I go to bed.

 THE FUTURE PERFECT CONTINUOUSS+ will + have + been + V-ingUsage: Diễn tả một hành động bắt đầu từ quá khứ và kéo dài đến một thời điểm cho trước ở tương lai.Dấu hiệu nhận biết: By…….for ( + khoảng thời gian)By then/ by the timeEg:By December, we will have been living in this house for 10 years.

NOTE: Không dùng các động từ chỉ nhận thức tri giác ở các thì tiếp diễnMột số công thức cần lưu ýNote 1:When + Simple Past, Past Continuous|or| Past Continuous + when + Simple Past|or| Simple Past+ when + Past ContinuousNote 2:While + Past Continuous, Simple Past|or| Simple Past+ while + Past Continuous|or| Past Continuous+ while + Past Continuous

15

Page 17: letrungkien.edu.vnletrungkien.edu.vn/uploads/laws/tieng-anh-on-tap-thi... · Web viewPHONETICS NGỮ ÂM * PHẦN I: LÝ THUYẾT. A. PRONUNCIATION. I. NGUYÊN ÂM. 1. Giới thiệu

Note 3:Before/ by the time + Simple Past, Past perfect|or| Past perfect+ before/by the time + Simple PastNote 4:After + Past perfect, Simple Past|or| Simple Past+ after + Past perfectNote 5:S +will / shall /may /can…..+ when /until / as soon as / before/after… + Simple Present/Present Perfect|or| when /until / as soon as / before/after… + Simple Present/Present Perfect + S +will / shall /may /can…..Note 6:Present Perfect + since + Simple Past|or| Since + Simple Past/ Present Perfect

* PHẦN II: BÀI TẬP TRẮC NGHIỆM (50 CÂU)

1-I …….Louisiana state University.A-am attending B-attend C-was attending D-attended2-He has been selling motorcycles……………A-ten years ago B-since ten years C-for ten years ago D-for ten years3-Columbus…….America more then 400 years ago.A-discovered B-has discovered C-had discovered D-he has gone4-He fell down when he ……towards the church.A-run B-runs C-was running D-had run5-We …….there when our father died.A-still lived B-lived still C-was still living D-were still living6-They …….pingpong when their father comes back home.A- will play B-will be playing C-play D-would play7-I…….in the room now.A-am being B-was being C-have been being D-am8-I……..to New York three times this year.A-have been B-was C-were D-had been9-I will come and see you before I……..for America. A-leave B-will leave C-have left D-shall leave10-John ……a book when I saw him.A-is reading B-read C-was reading D-reading11-Jack …..the door.A-has just opened B-open C-will have opened D-opening12-I have been waiting for you……….A-since early morning B-since 9 a. m C-for two hours D-all are correct13-My sister…….for you since yesterday.A- is looking B-was looking C-has been looking D-looked14-The train ………half an hour.A-has been leaving B-left C-has left D-had left15-We ………Doris since last Sunday.A-don’t see B-haven’t seen C-didn’t see D-hadn’t seen

16

Page 18: letrungkien.edu.vnletrungkien.edu.vn/uploads/laws/tieng-anh-on-tap-thi... · Web viewPHONETICS NGỮ ÂM * PHẦN I: LÝ THUYẾT. A. PRONUNCIATION. I. NGUYÊN ÂM. 1. Giới thiệu

16-After I………lunch, I looked for my bag.A-had B-had had C-have has D-have had17-By the end of next year, George………English for 2 years.A- will have learned B-will learn C-has learned D-would learn18-Henry ………into the restaurant when the writer was having dinner.A-was going B-went C-has gone D-did go19-He will take the dog out for a walk as soon as he …….dinner.A-finish B-finishes C-will finish D-shall have finished20-Before you asked, the letter……….A- was written B-had been written C-had written D-has been written21-Oil ……if you pour it on water.A-floated B-floats C-will be floated D-float22- Almost everyone……for home by the time we arrived.A-leave B-left C-leaves D-had left23-By the age of 25, he …….two famous novels.A- wrote B-writes C-has written D-had written24-While her husband was in the army, Janet ……. to him twice a week.A-was writing B-wrote C-was written D-had written25-I have never played badminton before. This is the first time I……..to play.A-try B-tried C-have tried D-am trying26-I don’t understand this sentence. What…………………….?A-does mean this word B-have this word meanC-means this word D-does this word mean27-John……..tennis once or twice a week.A-usually play B-is usually playing C-usually plays D-have usually played28-At 5 o’clock yesterday evening, I………my clothes.A-am ironing B-have ironed C-ironed D-was ironing29-Why ……..at me like that? What’s the matter?A-do you look B-have you looked C-did you look D-are you looking30-I……..along the street when I suddenly heard footsteps behind me.A-was walking B-am walking C-walk D-walked31-She ……..German for two years.A-has learnt B-is learning C-learn D-learns32-I usually …….away at weekends.A-have gone B-goes C-am going D-go33-When I last………Jane, she ……..to find a job.A-see/was trying B-saw/was trying C-have seen/tried D-saw/tried34-I……….at 8 o’clock every morning.A-was getting up B-got up C-is getting up D-get up35-It is a nice day. I ……….we go out for a walk.A-suggested B-suggest C-is suggesting D-are suggesting36-Tim was tired. He ……….hard all day.A-has been studyingB-studies C-studied D-had been studying37-What time…..the banks close in Britain?

17

Page 19: letrungkien.edu.vnletrungkien.edu.vn/uploads/laws/tieng-anh-on-tap-thi... · Web viewPHONETICS NGỮ ÂM * PHẦN I: LÝ THUYẾT. A. PRONUNCIATION. I. NGUYÊN ÂM. 1. Giới thiệu

A-do B-did C-does D-can38-I……..here at the end of the month.A-will leave B-would leave C-would have left D-is leaving39-My grandfather………many years ago.A-had died B-has died C-died D-was dying40-At last the bus came. We ………..for half an hour.A-waited B-was waiting C-have waited D-had been waiting41-Daniel……the bus. It doesn’t run on Sundays.A-did not catch B-have not caught C-had not caught D-couldn’t have caught42-I’m feeling sick. I……..so much chocolate last night.A-needn’t to eat B-did not eat C- mustn’t eat D-shouldn’t have eaten43-I’m going on holiday on Saturday. This time next week I……on a beach in the sea.A-will lie B-am lying C- will be lying D-should be lying44-Ted and Amy……for 24 years.A-have been married B-married C-were married D-has been married45-Tomorrow I……….my grandparents.A-am going to visit B-will have visited C-have visited D-visit46-When the first child was born, they……..married for three years.A-have been married B-had been marriedC-will been married D-will have been married47-I think the weather……….nice later.A-will be B-be C-had D- has been48-She ……..very angry when she knows this.A-shall be B-has been C-will have been D-will be49-The man got out the car ,………round to the back and opened the boot.

A-walking B-walked C-walks D-walk

50-For several years his ambition………to be a pilot.

A-is B-has been C-was D-had been

* PHẦN I I I : ĐÁP ÁN

1. A 2. D 3. A 4. C 5. D 6. B 7. D 8. A 9. A 10. C

11. A 12. D 13. C 14. B 15. B 16. B 17. A 18. B 19. B 20. B

21. B 22. D 23. D 24. B 25. C 26. D 27. C 28. D 29. D 30. A

31. A 32. D 33. B 34. D 35. B 36. D 37. A 38. A 39. C 40. D

41. D 42. D 43. C 44. A 45. A 46. A 47. A 48. D 49. B50. B

18

Page 20: letrungkien.edu.vnletrungkien.edu.vn/uploads/laws/tieng-anh-on-tap-thi... · Web viewPHONETICS NGỮ ÂM * PHẦN I: LÝ THUYẾT. A. PRONUNCIATION. I. NGUYÊN ÂM. 1. Giới thiệu

CHUYÊN ĐỀ 3 (THẦY HIỂN)

PASSIVE VOICE(THỂ BỊ ĐỘNG)

* PHẦN I: LÝ THUYẾT

I. C¸ch dïng c©u bÞ ®éng.- Khi kh«ng cÇn thiÕt ph¶i nh¾c ®Õn t¸c nh©n g©y hµnh ®éng( do t×nh huèng ®· qu¸ râ rµng hoÆc do kh«ng quan träng).Eg: The road has been repaired.-Khi chóng ta kh«ng biÕt hoÆc quªn ngêi thùc hiÖn hµnh ®éng.Eg: The money was stolen.- Khi chóng ta quan t©m ®Õn b¶n th©n hµnh ®éng h¬n lµ ngêi thùc hiÖn hµnh ®éng.Eg: This book was published in Vietnam.- Khi chñ ng÷ cña c©u chñ ®éng lµ chñ ng÷ kh«ng x¸c ®Þnh nh : people, they, someone…Eg: People say that he will win. It’s said that he will win.- Khi ngêi nãi kh«ng muèn nh¾c ®Õn chñ thÓ g©y ra hµnh ®éngEg: Smoking is not allowed here.II.CÊu tróc.

VÒ cÊu tróc c©u bÞ ®éng trong tiÕng Anh , t«i sÏ chia thµnh hai lo¹i sau :Lo¹i 1: BÞ ®éng ®èi víi c¸c th× kh«ng tiÕp diÔn.

D¹ng nµy cã c«ng thøc tæng qu¸t sau:

Lo¹i 2 : BÞ ®éng víi c¸c th× tiÕp diÔn.D¹ng nµy cã c«ng thøc tæng qu¸t sau:

Lo¹i 1 ¸p dông cho s¸u th× bÞ ®éng kh«ng tiÕp diÔn vµ lo¹i 2 ¸p dông cho s¸u th× bÞ ®éng tiÕp diÔn. Nhng trong phÇn nµy t«i chØ giíi thiÖu nh÷ng th× häc sinh ®· häc trong ch¬ng tr×nh , phôc vô cho thi häc k× vµ thi tèt nghiÖpTHPT bao gåm bèn th× bÞ ®éng kh«ng tiÕp diÔn lµ: th× hiÖn t¹i ®¬n , th× qu¸ khø ®¬n , th× hiÖn t¹i hoµn thµnh ,th× t¬ng lai ®¬n , bÞ ®éng víi ®éng tõ khuyÕt thiÕu vµ hai th× bÞ ®éng tiÕp diÔn lµ : HiÖn t¹i tiÕp diÔn vµ qu¸ khø tiÕp diÔn.

Lo¹i 1 : BÞ ®éng kh«ng tiÕp diÔn.

1)Th× hiÖn t¹i ®¬n:

Eg:Active: They raise cows in Ba Vi.

Passive: Cows are raised in Ba Vi.19

BE + PAST PARTICIPLE

BE + BEING + PAST PARTICIPLE

S + am / is/ are + Past Participle

Page 21: letrungkien.edu.vnletrungkien.edu.vn/uploads/laws/tieng-anh-on-tap-thi... · Web viewPHONETICS NGỮ ÂM * PHẦN I: LÝ THUYẾT. A. PRONUNCIATION. I. NGUYÊN ÂM. 1. Giới thiệu

2)Th× qu¸ khø ®¬n:

Eg:Active : Jame Watt invented the steam engine in 1784.

Passive : The steam engine was invented by Jame Watt in 1784.

3)Th× hiÖn t¹i hoµn thµnh:

Eg: Active: They have just finished the project.

Passive: The project has just been finished.

4)Th× t¬ng lai ®¬n:

Eg:Active:They will build a new school for disabled children next month. Passive: A new school for disabled children will be built next month.

5. §éng tõ khuyÕt thiÕu.

EX1: Active : You can see him now.

Passive : He can be seen (by you) now.EX2:

Active : He should type his term paper.Passive : His term paper should be typed.

Lo¹i 2: BÞ ®éng tiÕp diÔn.

1) Th× hiÖn t¹i tiÕp diÔn:

Eg: Active: Ann is writing a letter. Passive: A letter is being written by Ann

2) Th× qu¸ khø tiÕp diÔn:

Eg:Active: She was cleaning the room at 7 a.m yesterday.Passive: The room was being cleaned at 7 a.m yesterday.

20

S + was / were + Past Participle

S + have/ has been + Past Participle

S + will be + Past Participle

S + Modal Verb + be + Past Participle.

S + am / is / are +being + Past Participle

S + was / were + being + Past Participle

Page 22: letrungkien.edu.vnletrungkien.edu.vn/uploads/laws/tieng-anh-on-tap-thi... · Web viewPHONETICS NGỮ ÂM * PHẦN I: LÝ THUYẾT. A. PRONUNCIATION. I. NGUYÊN ÂM. 1. Giới thiệu

III. C¸ch chuyÓn tõ c©u chñ ®éng sang c©u bÞ ®éng.

Muèn chuyÓn tõ c©u chñ ®éng sang c©u bÞ ®éng häc sinh cÇn n¾m ch¾c c¸c bíc chuyÓn sau ®©y:X¸c ®Þnh t©n ng÷ trong c©u chñ ®éng , chuyÓn nã thµnh chñ ng÷ trong c©u bÞ ®éng.- X¸c ®Þnh th× cña ®éng tõ trong c©u chñ ®éng, chia “to be” t¬ng øng víi th× tiÕng Anh ®ã vµ víi chñ ng÷ míi cña c©u bÞ ®éng.- Chia ®éng tõ chÝnh trong c©u chñ ®éng ë d¹ng past participle trong c©u bÞ ®éng.- By+ t¸c nh©n g©y hµnh ®éng ( khi muèn nhÊn m¹nh t¸c nh©n g©y hµnh ®éng)

S + V + O

S + V (participle) + O

Eg: They will finish this work tomorrow.

S V O

This work will befinished (by them) tomorrow.

Trong phÇn nµy cÇn lu ý häc sinh mét sè vÊn ®Ò sau:- C¸c tr¹ng tõ chØ c¸ch thøc thêng ®îc ®Æt tríc ®éng tõ ph©n tõ hai trong c©u bÞ ®éng.Eg: He wrote the book wonderfully. The book was wonderfully written.- By + t¸c nh©n g©y hµnh ®éng ®øng sau tr¹ng ng÷ chØ n¬i chèn vµ ®øng tríc tr¹ng ng÷ chØ thêi gian.Eg1: A passer- by took him home. He was taken home by a passer- by.Eg2: We will receive the gifts on Monday. The gifts will be received by us on Monday.

- C©u bÞ ®éng phñ ®Þnh vµ nghi vÊn ®îc t¹o gièng nh c¸ch cña c©u chñ ®éng.Tuy nhiªn kh«ng ph¶i bÊt cø c©u nµo còng cã thÓ chuyÓn tõ chñ ®éng

sang bÞ ®éng hoÆc ngîc l¹i. §iÒu kiÖn ®Ó chuyÓn mét c©u chñ ®éng sang c©u bÞ ®éng lµ c©u ®ã ph¶i cã mét transitive verb ( ®éng tõ ngo¹i híng). C©u cã intransitive verb ( ®éng tõ néi híng) th× kh«ng thÓ chuyÓn sang c©u bÞ ®éng. §éng tõ ngo¹i híng lµ ®éng tõ cÇn mét t©n ng÷ trùc tiÕp trong khi ®éng tõ néi h-íng th× kh«ng cÇn mét t©n ng÷ trùc tiÕp.

Eg: 1) She is making a cake. A cake is being made by her. Transitive verb 2) They run along the beach every morning. Intransitive verb

II. C¸c d¹ng ®Æc biÖt cña c©u bÞ ®éng.

ViÖc chuyÓn ®æi tõ c©u chñ ®éng sang c©u bÞ ®éng hoµn toµn tuú thuéc vµo cÊu tróc c©u do ®ã c¸ch tèt nhÊt ®Ó n¾m v÷ng c¸ch chuyÓn ®æi lµ xem xet nã díi cÊp ®é c¸c mÉu c©u ®· biÕt.

21

Page 23: letrungkien.edu.vnletrungkien.edu.vn/uploads/laws/tieng-anh-on-tap-thi... · Web viewPHONETICS NGỮ ÂM * PHẦN I: LÝ THUYẾT. A. PRONUNCIATION. I. NGUYÊN ÂM. 1. Giới thiệu

1.MÉu c©u : S + V + O (C, A)Trong mÉu c©u nµy t©n ng÷ cã thÓ lµ mét danh tõ, côm tõ hoÆc ®¹i tõ.H·y xÐt mét sè vÝ dô sau:

Eg: Active: Her mother is cleaning the kitchen. Passive: The kitchen is being cleaned by her mother.

Eg: They called him Mr. Angry.He was called Mr. Angry.

Eg: He put the table in the corner. The table was put in the corner.

2. MÉu c©u :

§èi víi c©u cã hai t©n ng÷, chóng ta cã thÓdïng mét trong hai t©n ng÷ chuyÓn thµnh chñ ng÷ trong c©u bÞ ®éng. Tuy nhiªn, t©n ng÷ chØ ngêi thêng hay ®îc sö dông nhiÒu h¬n.Eg: We gave him a nice present on his birthday.

Oi Od- C¸ch chuyÓn thø nhÊt: He was given a nice present on his birthday.- C¸ch chuyÓn thø hai : CÇn thªm mét giíi tõ.A nice present was given to him on his birthday.

Cã hai giíi tõ cã thÓ ®îc dïng trong trêng hîp nµy lµ : to, for.Mét sè ®éng tõ dïng víi ‘to’: give, bring, send, show, write, post, pass…Mét sè ®éng tõ dïng víi ‘for’ : buy, make, cook, keep, find, get, save, order ………..Eg1 : She didn’t show me this special camera. This camera wasn’t shown to me.Eg 2: She is making him a cup of tea. A cup of tea is being made for him.

3. C©u bÞ ®éng víi c¸c ®éng tõ têng thuËt.C¸c ®éng tõ têng thuËt thêng ®îc dïng ®Ó têng thuËt l¹i c¸c c©u nãi, ý

nghÜ, c©u hái , yªu cÇu, lêi xin lçi ……… Mét sè ®éng tõ têng thuËt thêng gÆp lµ : say, think, know, believe, ask, tell, promise….

Cã hai cÊu tróc liªn quan ®Õn ®éng tõ têng thuËt:

a. MÉu c©u : Active:

Passive :

Eg: He told me that you had a new bike. I was told that you had a new bike.

b. MÉu c©u

MÉu c©u nµy cã hai c¸ch chuyÓn sang d¹ng bÞ ®éng:

- C¸ch 1 : dïng chñ ng÷ gi¶ “it”

22

S + V + O

S + V + O + C

S + V + O + A

S + V + Oi + that clause.

S (Oi) + be past participle + that clause.

S + V + that + clause.

S + V + O + O

Page 24: letrungkien.edu.vnletrungkien.edu.vn/uploads/laws/tieng-anh-on-tap-thi... · Web viewPHONETICS NGỮ ÂM * PHẦN I: LÝ THUYẾT. A. PRONUNCIATION. I. NGUYÊN ÂM. 1. Giới thiệu

Eg: People think that I am the best student in my class. It is thought that I am the best student in my class.

- C¸ch 2 : dïng chñ ng÷ cña mÖnh ®Ò that vµ sö dông d¹ng nguyªn mÉu cña ®éng tõ. ë vÝ dô trªn , cã c¸ch chuyÓn thø hai lµ:

Eg: I am thought to be the best student in my class.ë c¸ch chuyÓn thø hai , cã thÓ dïng 3 d¹ng nguyªn mÉu cña ®éng tõ: 1) To- inf: khi hµnh ®éng x¶y ra ë mÖnh ®Ò that diÔn ra cïng th× hoÆc

diÔn ra sau hµnh ®éng ë mÖnh ®Ò têng thuËt.2) nguyªn mÉu tiÕp diÔn: to be ving, khi hµnh ®éng ë mÖnh ®Ò that ë

th× tiÕp diÔn , cßn hµnh ®éng ë mÖnh ®Ò têng thuËt ë th× ®¬n gi¶n, cïng bËc.3)nguyªn mÉu hoµn thµnh: to have done, khi hµnh ®éng ë mÖnh ®Ò

that x¶y ra tríc hµnh ®éng ë mÖnh ®Ò têng thuËt.

Eg1: People say that he is a rich man. He is said to be a rich man.Eg2: They think that she is living there. She is thought to be living there.Eg3: They said that Tom had left home before the weekend.

Tom was said to have left home before the weekend.4. C©u mÖnh lÖnh.

Khi chuyÓn c©u mÖnh lÖnh sang c©u bÞ ®éng ta sö dông cÊu tróc sau:

Eg: Take off your hat! Let your hat be taken off!

Ngoµi c¸ch trªn, cßn mét c¸ch kh¸c ®Ó chuyÓn c©u mÖnh lÖnh sang c©u bÞ ®éng nhng Ýt dïng h¬n. §ã lµ:

Eg: Active: Look after the children please! Passive: The children should be looked after!HoÆc : The children are to be looked after!

5. WH- question.

§èi víi nh÷ng c©u hái cã tõ ®Ó hái, chóng ta cã thÓ chia lµm hai lo¹i:

Lo¹i 1 : Tõ ®Ó hái cã chøc n¨ng lµ t©n ng÷ trong c©u chñ ®éng. Víi d¹ng c©u hái nµy viÖc chuyÓn sang c©u bÞ ®éng rÊt ®¬n gi¶n v× tõ ®Ó hái ®ã sÏ cã chøc n¨ng lµ chñ ng÷ trong c©u bÞ ®éng.

Eg: Active: How many languages do they speak in Canada? Passive: How many languages are spoken in Canada?

Lo¹i 2: Tõ ®Ó hái cã chøc n¨ng lµ chñ ng÷ trong c©u chñ ®éng khi chuyÓn sang c©u bÞ ®éng, nã sÏ cã vai trß lµ t©n ng÷ trong c©u. Khi ®ã, ta sÏ cã hai c¸ch chuyÓn. HoÆc chuyÓn By lªn ®Çu c©u( tõ ®Ó hái sÏ ë d¹ng t©n ng÷) hoÆc ®Ó By ë cuèi c©u.

23

Active: V + O + AdjunctPassive: Let +O + be past participle + Adjunct.

S + am/ is/ are + to be + past participleHoÆc S should be + past participle

Page 25: letrungkien.edu.vnletrungkien.edu.vn/uploads/laws/tieng-anh-on-tap-thi... · Web viewPHONETICS NGỮ ÂM * PHẦN I: LÝ THUYẾT. A. PRONUNCIATION. I. NGUYÊN ÂM. 1. Giới thiệu

Eg: Who wrote this novel ? Who was this novel written by? HoÆc: By whom was this novel written?

6. CÊu tróc :

Cã hai trêng hîp x¶y ra:a. T©n ng÷ cña Ving cïng chØ mét ®èi tîng víi chñ ng÷ cña c©u:Eg: He kept me waiting.-> I was kept waiting ( by him).b. T©n ng÷ cña Ving kh«ng chØ mét ®èi tîng víi chñ ng÷ cña c©u:Eg : He hates people looking at him.=> He hates being looked at ( by people).

7. CÊu tróc :

a.

- Khi t©n ng÷ kh«ng cïng ®èi tîng víi chñ ng÷.

Eg : We asked him to do it.-> He was asked to do it.- Khi t©n ng÷ cïng ®èi tîng víi chñ ng÷.

Eg : She would love someone to take her out to dinner.-> She would love to be taken out to dinner.

b.

- Khi chuyÓn sang c©u bÞ ®éng chóng ta dïng To-infinitive trõ ®éng tõ “let”.

Eg : We heard him sing this song.-> He was heard to sing this song.Nhng : They let us go home.

-> We were let go home.HoÆc : We were allowed to go home.

8. CÊu tróc

a. Víi have.

Eg :I has him repair my bicycle yesterday.-> I had my bicycle repaired yesterday.

24

S + V + O + Ving

S + V + O + to + V

S + V + O + V( without to)

Have / get something done. ( dạng nhờ bảo ).

Active : S + have + Object( person) + bare infinitive + Object.Passive : S + have + Object ( thing) + Past Participle (+ by + Object( person))

S + V + O ( to) + V

Page 26: letrungkien.edu.vnletrungkien.edu.vn/uploads/laws/tieng-anh-on-tap-thi... · Web viewPHONETICS NGỮ ÂM * PHẦN I: LÝ THUYẾT. A. PRONUNCIATION. I. NGUYÊN ÂM. 1. Giới thiệu

c. Víi get.

Eg: I get her to make some coffee.-> I get some coffee made.

* PHẦN II: BÀI TẬP TRẮC NGHIỆM (50 CÂU)

Choose the best answer.1. All bottles _________ before transportation.

A. frozen B. is frozen C. was frozen D. were frozen 2. Everything that _________ remained a secret.

A. had be overheard B. had been overheard C. had been overheared D. would had been overheard3. Everything ___________.

A. were forbidden + B. is forbidden C. is forbidded D. are forbidden4. Everything___________________________.

A. are going to be forgotten B. is going to be forgottenC. is going to be forgot D. were goi

ng to be forgotten5. I___________________________.

A. have not given the money B. have not been given the money

C. have not been give the money D. have not be given the money6. It _______ for years.

A. has not be known B. had not been known C. had not be known D. have not been known7. It _________ that learning English is easy.

A. are said B. said C. is said D. is sayed8. John and Ann___________________________.

A. were not mislead B. were not misleeded C. was not misled D. were not misled9. Our horses ________.

A. are well feeded B. are well fed C. is well fed D. is well feeded10. Peter and Tom _________ in an accident yesterday.

A. is hurt B. is hurted C. were hurt D. were hurted11. South Florida and HawaiI _________ by a hurricane.

A. is hit B. have been hit C. have are hit D. has been hit12. The battles _________ for liberation .

A. had be fought B. had been fighted C. had been fought D. has been fought13. We can’t go along here because the road........................

25

Active: S + get + O (person) + to infinitive + O ( thing)Passive : S + get + O (thing) + Past participle (+by + O(person))

Page 27: letrungkien.edu.vnletrungkien.edu.vn/uploads/laws/tieng-anh-on-tap-thi... · Web viewPHONETICS NGỮ ÂM * PHẦN I: LÝ THUYẾT. A. PRONUNCIATION. I. NGUYÊN ÂM. 1. Giới thiệu

A. is repairing B. is repaired C. is being repaired D. repairs14. The story I’ve just read_________ Agatha Christie.

A. was written B. was written by C. was written from D. wrote by15. I’m going to go out and_________

A. have cut my hair B. have my hair cut C. cut my hair D. my hair be cut16. Something funny_________ in class yesterday.

A. happened B. was happened C. happens D. is happened17. Many US automobiles_________ in Detroit, Michigan

A. manufacture B. have manufactured C. are manufactured D. are manufacturing18. A lot of pesticide residue can_________ unwashed produce.

A. find B. found C. be finding D. be found19. We_________ by a loud noise during the night.

A. woke up B. are woken up C. were woken up D. were waking up20. Some film stars_________ difficult to work with.

A. are said be B. are said to be C. say to be D. said to be21. Why did Tom keep making jokes about me? – I don’t enjoy_________ at.

A. be laughed B. to be laughed C. laughing D. being laughed22. Today, many serious childhood diseases_________ by early immunization.

A. are preventing B. can prevent C. prevent D. can be prevented23. Do you get your heating_________ every year?

A. checking B. check C. be checked D. checked24. Bicycles_________ in the driveway.

A. must not leave B. must not be leaving C. must not be left D. must not have left25. Beethoven’s Fifth Symphony_________ next weekend.

A. is going to be performed B. has been performedC. will be performing D. will have perform

26. All bottles_________ before transportation.A. frozen B. were froze C. were frozen D. are froze

27. ___________________________.yet?A. Have the letters been typed B. Have been the letters typed

C. Have the letters typed D. Had the letters typed28. English has become a second language in countries like India, Nigeria or Singapore where `_________ for administration, broadcasting and education.

A. is used B. it is used C. used D. being used29. The telephones_________ by Alexander Graham Bell.

A. is invented B. is inventing C. invented D. was inve26

Page 28: letrungkien.edu.vnletrungkien.edu.vn/uploads/laws/tieng-anh-on-tap-thi... · Web viewPHONETICS NGỮ ÂM * PHẦN I: LÝ THUYẾT. A. PRONUNCIATION. I. NGUYÊN ÂM. 1. Giới thiệu

nted30. Lots of houses_________ by the earthquake.

A. are destroying B. destroyed C. were destroyed D. is destroyed31. Gold_________ in California in the 19th century.

A. was discovered B. has been discovered C. was discover D. they discover32. The preparation_________ by the time the guest_________

A. had been finished- arrived B. have finished- arrivedC. had finished-were arriving D. have been finished- were arrived

33. The boy_________ by the teacher yesterday.A. punish B. punished C. punishing D. was puni

shed34. “Ms Jones, please type those letters before noon”_ “They’ve already ______, sir. They’re on your desk.”

A. typed B. been being typed C. being typed D. been typed 35. Sarah is wearing a blouse. It___________ of cotton.

A. be made B. are made C. is made D. made36. They had a boy _________ that yesterday.

A. done B. to do C. did D. do 37. We got our mail _________ yesterday.

A. been delivered B. delivered C. delivering D. to deliver 38. James……..the news as soon as possible.

A. should tell B. should be told C. should told D. should be telled39. My wedding ring _________ yellow and white gold.

A. is made B. is making C. made D. make40. Mr. Wilson is _________ as Willie to his friend.

A. known B. knew C. is known D. know41. References _________ in the examination room.

A. not are used B. is not used C. didn’t used D. are not used 42. Laura _________ in Boston.

A. are born B. were bornC. was born D. born43. His car needs _________

A. be fixed B. fixing C. to be fixing D. fixed44. Her watch needs _________.

A. repairing B. to be repaired C. repaired D. A and B45. My mother is going _________ this house.

A. sold B. sell C. to be sold D. to sell46. There’s somebody behind us. I think we are _________.

A. being followed B. are followed C. follow D. following47. Have you _________ by a dog?

A. biteB. bit C. ever been bitten D. ever been bit48. The room is being _________ at the moment.

27

Page 29: letrungkien.edu.vnletrungkien.edu.vn/uploads/laws/tieng-anh-on-tap-thi... · Web viewPHONETICS NGỮ ÂM * PHẦN I: LÝ THUYẾT. A. PRONUNCIATION. I. NGUYÊN ÂM. 1. Giới thiệu

A. was cleaned B. cleaned C. cleaning D. clean49. It _________ that the strike will end soon.

A. is expected B. expected C. are expected D. was expected50. It is _________ that many people are homeless after the floods.

A. was reported B. reports C. reported D. reporting* PHẦN I I I : ĐÁP ÁN

1D 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7C 8D 9B 10C

11B 12C 13C 14B 15B 16B 17C 18D 19C 20B

21D 22D 23D 24C 25A 26C 27A 28B 29D 30C

31A 32A 33D 34D 35C 36D 37B 38B 39A 40A

41D 42C 43B 44D 45D 46A 47C 48B 49A 50C

CHUYÊN ĐỀ 4 (THẦY PHIÊN)

CONDITIONAL SENTENCES(CÂU ĐIỀU KIỆN)

* PHẦN I: LÝ THUYẾT

I. Định nghĩa.- Câu điều kiện gồm hai phần: Mệnh đề điều kiện (bắt đầu bằng “If”) và Mệnh đề chính.- Câu điều kiện được chia làm ba loại câu: Loại 1 (Type1: True in the present / future)

Loại 2 (Type2: Untrue in the present / future)Loại 3 (Typy3: Untrue in the past)

1. Type 1:The real present or future conditional senntence.A. Cách thành lập.

If – clause Main clauseSimple present

Subject + V-s/es……..Simple future

Subject + will/shall + V-bare infinitive…… If + S + V/V-s/es…………., S + will/shall + V-bare infinitive…..

Ex: 1. If I have enough time, I will write to my parents.2. If they try hard, they will pass the exam.

B. Cách dùngDùng diễn tả điều kiện có thể xãy ra ở hiện tại hoặc tương lai.* Chú ý.

1. Chúng ta có thể dùng Can, May, Might, Must, Have to, Should, Had better để thay thế cho Will / Shall

Can: Dùng diễn tả một khả năng, năng lực có thể làm. (ability)Ex: 1. If you work harder, you can get success.May: Dùng diễn tả một khả năng có thể xảy ra, hoặc một sự cho phép, xin phép.Ex: 1. If you don’t feel well, you may go home now.Must: Diễn tả sự bắt buộc hay cần thiết có tính chủ quan.(do cảm nghĩ của người nói)Ex: 1. If you want to pass the final exam, you must study harder.

28

Page 30: letrungkien.edu.vnletrungkien.edu.vn/uploads/laws/tieng-anh-on-tap-thi... · Web viewPHONETICS NGỮ ÂM * PHẦN I: LÝ THUYẾT. A. PRONUNCIATION. I. NGUYÊN ÂM. 1. Giới thiệu

Have to: Diễn tả sự bắt buộc hay cần thiết có tính khách quan.(do yếu tố bên ngoài)Ex: 1. If you want to cross the river, you have to take the ferry.Should: Diễn tả lời khuyên.Ex: 1. If you want to lose weight, you should go on a diet.

2. Chúng ta có thể dùng thể mệnh lệnh (imperative form) ở mệnh đề chính khi muốn thể hiện sự yêu cầu, đề nghị, cho phép. . . .

Ex 1. If you see him, tell him to write to me.2. Don’t go outside the harbor if the wind is strong.

3. Ta có thể dùng thì hiện tại tiếp diễn (present continuous) hay hiện tại hoàn thành (present perfect) để thay cho hiện tại đơn trong mệnh đề “If”.

Ex:4. Ta dùng thì hiện tại đơn thay cho thì tương lai đơn ở mệnh đề chính để diễn tả quy luật

của thiên nhiên hoặc một hậu quả tất yếu. (gọi là điều kiện loại 0)Ex 1. If you heat ice, it turns to water.

2. If you cook water, it boils at 100C2. Type 2: Present unreal conditional sentence.A. Cách thành lập.

If – clause Main clausePast subjunctive

Subject + V-ed / column 2….. To be were

Simple conditionalS + could/should/would/might + V-bare

inf. ...If + S + V-ed/3…………………………….., S + would/should/could…+ V(bare)……..

Ex: 1. If he were here, he might tell the truth.2. I have a little money now. If I had a lot of money, I would buy a new bicycle.

B. Cách dùngDùng diễn tả điều kiện không thật hoặc trái ngược với một sự việc xãy ra ở hiện tại.* Chú ý.

1. Ta có thể dùng “would be doing” thay thế cho “would do” ở mệnh đề chính.Ex: 1. If I were on holiday in Do son, I would be lying in the sun now.

2. Ta có thể dùng thì quá khứ tiếp diễn (past continuous) thay thế cho thì quá khứ đơn (past simple) ở mệnh đề điều kiện (if-clause)

Ex: 1. If my car were working, I could drive you to the station3. Type 3: Past unreal conditional sentence.A. Cách thành lập.

If – clause Main clausePast perfect

(Subject + had + PP……..)Conditional prefect

S + could/would/should/might + have + PP. ….

Ex: 1. If he had seen you yesterday, he would have given you the letter.2. If he had come to see me yesterday, I would have taken you to the movies.

B. Cách dùng:Dùng diễn tả điều kiện không thật hoặc trái ngược với một sự việc đã xãy ra trong quá khứ.* Chú ý.

1. Ta có thể dùng “would have been doing” thay thế cho “would have done” ở mệnh đề chính.

2. Ta có thể dùng “had been doing” thay thế cho “had done” ở mệnh đề điều kiện.Ex 1. I was wearing a seatbelt. If I hadn’t been wearing one, I would been seriously injured.II. Những hình thức khác trong câu điều kiện.

1. Ta dùng Unless (trừ phi, nếu . . . không) thay thế cho If…..not

29

Page 31: letrungkien.edu.vnletrungkien.edu.vn/uploads/laws/tieng-anh-on-tap-thi... · Web viewPHONETICS NGỮ ÂM * PHẦN I: LÝ THUYẾT. A. PRONUNCIATION. I. NGUYÊN ÂM. 1. Giới thiệu

Ex 1. Unless it rains, we will go to the cinema = If it doesn’t rain, we will go to the cinema.2. If she doesn’t water these trees, they will die = Unless she water these trees, they will

die.2. Ta có thể bỏ “If” và “ Unless” bằng cách đảo chủ từ ra sau should, were, had.

a. Đảo ngữ câu điều kiện loại 1: Should + S + Vo, S + Will +VoEx: If he has free time, he’ll play tennis. Should he have free time, he’ll play tennis

b. Đảo ngữ câu điều kiện loại 2: Were + S + to - infinitive, S + Would + VoEx: If I learnt Russian, I would read a Russian book. Were I to learn Russian, I would read a Russian bookEx If I were you, I wouldn’t do that. Were I you, I wouldn’t do that.

c. Đảo ngữ câu điều kiện loại 3: Had + S + V3/Ved, S + Would have + V3/VedIf he had trained hard, he would have won the match.

Had he trained hard, he would have won the match.

3. Ta có thể kết hợp điều kiện loại 2 và loại 3 trong một câu. (Câu điều kiện pha trộn) Ex: 1. If I hadn’t stayed up late last night, I wouldn’t be so tired now. (Kinh nghiệm:

Thường có trạng từ đi theo) 2. You wouldn’t be so hungry if you had had breakfast this morning.(Kinh nghiệm: Hoặc không cho trạng từ thì ta dịch tình huống)

4. Mệnh đề điều kiện có thể rút gọn thành “without (không có) / thank to (nhờ vào) + phrase”

Ex: 1. Without water, we couldn’t exist = If there weren’t any water, we couldn’t exist.2. If he hadn’t lent us the money, we wouldn’t have been able to buy the house= Without his money, we wouldn’t have been able to buy the house

5. Provided (that), on condition (that), as long as , so long as ( miễn là, với điều kiện là )Suppose, supposing (giả sử như ) In case ( trong trường hợp )Even if (ngay cả khi, dù cho) . . . có thể dùng thay thế cho “If” trong mệnh đề điều kiện

Ex: 1. In case I forget, please remind me of my promise.2. Suppose the news is true, what will you do?3. I’ll change my decision provided that you accept my offer.

6. Câu điều kiện có “Otherwise / Or / Or else” (nếu không thì)Dạng câu như sau: Imperative + or + Clause = If you don’t + V. . ., Clause

= If you aren’t + . . . , ClauseEx: 1. Go away or I will call the police.   =  If you don’t go away, I will call the police.       2. Be careful or you will cut yourself. = If you aren’t careful, you will cut yourself.

3. Give me the money or/ or else I’ll kill you. = If you don’t give me the money, I’ll kill you.

4. You should come back before 10.00 pm. Otherwise, you’ll be locked outside= If you don’t come back before 10.00 pm. You’ll be locked outside.5. I used my father’s car. I would have been late, otherwise= If I hadn’t used my father’s car, I would have been late.

7. Cấu trúc: As If / As though (như thể) Chỉ hành động có thể xảy ra ở hiện tại

S1 + Vsimple present + As if /As though + S2 + Vsimple present Ex 1. Do you hear that music next door? It sounds As if they are having a party

30

Page 32: letrungkien.edu.vnletrungkien.edu.vn/uploads/laws/tieng-anh-on-tap-thi... · Web viewPHONETICS NGỮ ÂM * PHẦN I: LÝ THUYẾT. A. PRONUNCIATION. I. NGUYÊN ÂM. 1. Giới thiệu

Chỉ hành động hoặc sự kiện không có thật ở hiện tại.S1 + Vsimple present + As if /As though + S2 + Vpast simple

Ex 1. He acts as though he were rich.2. He talks as if he knew everything in the world. 

Chỉ hành động hay sự kiện không có thật ở quá khứ.S1 + Vsimple past + As if /As though + S2 + Vpast perfect

Ex: 1. Jeff looked as though he had seen a ghost.2. She talked about the contest as if she had won the grand prize.

8. Mệnh đề điều kiện được thay thế bằng “But for” (nếu không tại…/nếu không vì…)But for + phrase / noun / V-ing = “If it weren’t for….”

= “If it hadn’t been for…”Ex: 1. But for the high salary, the job wouldn’t be worth doing

= If it weren’t for the high salary, the job wouldn’t be worth doing2. But for the bad weather ,we would have enjoyed the journey= If it hadn’t been for the bad weather, we would have enjoyed the journey3. But for the storm, we should have arrived much earlier = If it hadn’t been for the storm, we should have arrived earlier.

9. Dạng câu: “Do you mind if I . . . / Would you mind if I . . .” Dạng câu 1: “Do you mind / Would you mind + V-ing. . .”Dạng câu 2: “Do you mind if I + V- infinitive . . .”Dạng câu 3: “Would you mind if I + V Past simple . . .” Ex 1: A: Would you mind sitting in the front seat of the taxi?

B: No problemEx 2: A: Would you mind if I took a photo?

B: Not at allEx 3: A: Do you mind if I sit down?

B: Please do.

10. If only = I wish / I hope (ước gì.., hy vọng rằng…)Ex 1: If only he comes = I hope he comes

Câu “If only” có thể đứng một mình, và có thể là mệnh đề điều kiện trong câu điều kiện.Ex 2: If only he comes!

If only he comes early, we’ll be able to warm him.III. CÁCH VIẾT CÂU ĐIỀU KIỆN TỪ TÌNH HUỐNG

T. HUỐNG CHO: 1.Có từ “OR & AND” : viết đk loại 1 2. H.tại : loại 2 3.Q. khư : loại 3

4.Có từ “SO”: viết xuôi S + V SO S + V

IF + S + V , S + V 5. Có từ “BECAUSE”: viết ngược

S + V because S +V

IF + S + V , S + V 6. Phủ định viết khẳng định & ngược lại

Examples: 1. I am not clever, so I won’t be a doctor.

31

Page 33: letrungkien.edu.vnletrungkien.edu.vn/uploads/laws/tieng-anh-on-tap-thi... · Web viewPHONETICS NGỮ ÂM * PHẦN I: LÝ THUYẾT. A. PRONUNCIATION. I. NGUYÊN ÂM. 1. Giới thiệu

If I were clever, I would be a doctor. 2. John was sick because he ate much cake. If John hadn’t eaten much cake, he’d not have been sick.Trường hợp khác :1.

S + can /will + V1 but S + must/ have to + V1

IF + S + V1/Vs,es , S + can/ will + V1 ( Đk 1)Ex: I’ll let you borrow the book but you must promise to return it next week. è If you promise to return the book next week, I’ll let you borrow it.2.

V 1 or S + will /can +V1

è S + will/ can + V1 unless you + V1

Ex: Work hard or you’ll fail the exam è You’ll fail the exam unless you work hard.

* PHẦN II: BÀI TẬP TRẮC NGHIỆM (50 CÂU)

I. Choose the word or phrase that bests completes each sentence.1. If I………him yesterday, I would have to come back tomorrow.

a. didn’t meet b. have met c. met d. hadn’t met2. If she………the truth, I think she’d never want to see you again.

a. would know b. knows c. will know d. knew3. I would never have believed………it with my own eyes.

a. if I didn’t see b. if I hadn’t seen c. if I haven’t seen d. if I wouldn’t have seen

4. Such typing mistakes………avoided if you had ben more careful.a. can have been b. would be c. might have been d. should be

5. Carol was late for work this morning. But for the traffic jam, she………half an hour earlier.

a. could come b. could have come c. had come d. can have come6. Don’t worry………home late tonight.

a. when I’ll be b. if I’ll be c. unless I’ll be d. if I’m7. I………one of my special desserts for dinner, if you like.

a. make b. ‘ll make c. ‘m going to make d. ‘m making8. If I………the flu, I would have joined you for the trip.

a. hadn’t had b. haven’t had c. didn’t have d. had had9. But for the hold-up, we………here in time.

a. would have been b. could be c. had been d. must have been10. I lost your phone number. Otherwise, I………you much earlier.

a. will contact b. would have contacted c. would contact d. had contacted11. If the lecturer………so quickly, we’d have understood his speech better.

a. didn’t speak b. hadn’t spoken c. wouldn’t have spoken d. shouldn’t have spoken

12. If you put salt in water, it………a. dissolves b. would dissolve c. could dissolve d. dissolved

13. ………, please paint the windows before you leave.a. If you’ll have enough time b. If you have enough timec. Unless you have enough time b. Unless you can have enough time

14. Jeff wouldn’t have bumped into the waitress if he………in such a hurry.

32

Page 34: letrungkien.edu.vnletrungkien.edu.vn/uploads/laws/tieng-anh-on-tap-thi... · Web viewPHONETICS NGỮ ÂM * PHẦN I: LÝ THUYẾT. A. PRONUNCIATION. I. NGUYÊN ÂM. 1. Giới thiệu

a. weren’t b. hasn’t been c. hadn’t been d. wouldn’t have been

15. If you………Mary by chance, please give her my phone number.a. met b. should meet c. could meet d. will meet

16. My parents lent me the money. Otherwise, I………this shop.a. hadn’t opened b. couldn’t open c. weren’t be able to open d. wouldn’t have opened

17. I think she would forgive you if you………to speak to her.a. are trying b. would try c. tried d. have tried

18. I wouldn’t have to take this course if my English………better.a. were b. had been c. would be d. would have been

19. If we hadn’t got lost, we………arrived much earlier.a. had b. would be c. might be d. could have

20. But for his wife’s encouragement, he………gotten to the top of his profession.a. hadn’t b. hasn’t c. won’t have d. wouldn’t have

21. She was too shy. Otherwise, she………many more friends.a. will make b. can make c. would have made d. should have made

22. If I had known that you couldn’t eat eel, I………bought it.a. wouldn’t b. won’t have c. hadn’t d. wouldn’t have

23. Without the life-jackets, most passengers………drowned in that accident.a. would have been b. would be c. had been d. were

24. If I………Japanese was so difficult, I wouldn’t have taken it up.a. knew b. had known c. would have known d. might have known

25. If the story………true, the newspaper would have printed it.a. wasn’t b. weren’t c. didn’t be d. hadn’t beenII. Choose the underlined part in each sentence that needs correcting.

26. What do you do if you won the first prize of the lottery?27. Would people be able to fly if they have feathers instead of hair?28. I would do it if I could, but I can’t so I wouldn’t even trry.29. If a drop of oil is placed in a glass of water, it would float to the top.30. If Peter had been more careful, he wouldn’t break the camera I lent him.31. Roger wouldn’t have made such a lot of mistakes if he hasn’t been so tired.32. How nice it would be for our parents if we could built the house.33. He wouldn’t have able to pass the test if his English hadn’t been good enough.34. If only we knew all this information about the market many weeks ago.35. If your son were old enough, he could be able to take the competition next week.36. If she had send a telegram, we would have received it by now.37. They wouldn’t have order more books if they had noticed that the sales were falling.38. I would have called you if I could have known your number.39. Had I known you were in hospital, I had come to visit you.40. If I were to win one million dollars, I’ll quit my job at one.41. If you knew anything about the accident, you’d better call the police.42. Ice always melts if the air temperature was warm enough.43. In case you needed to see me, I’ll be in my office tomorrow morning around ten.A44. It’s easy Maria to speak Spanish because it’s her native language.45. The sun is so bright to look at directly.

46. My father gave me a watch for my birthday, but I wish he has given me laptop instead. 47. If your son were old enough, he could be able to take the competition next week. 48. If she had send a telegram, we would have received it by now. 49. They wouldn’t have order more books if they had noticed that the sales were falling. 50. I would have called you if I could have known your number.

33

Page 35: letrungkien.edu.vnletrungkien.edu.vn/uploads/laws/tieng-anh-on-tap-thi... · Web viewPHONETICS NGỮ ÂM * PHẦN I: LÝ THUYẾT. A. PRONUNCIATION. I. NGUYÊN ÂM. 1. Giới thiệu

* PHẦN III: ĐÁP ÁN

1D 2D 3B 4C 5B 6D 7D 8A 9A 10B11B 12A 13B 14C 15B 16D 17C 18A 19D 20D21C 22D 23A 24B 25D 1A 2C 3D 4C 5C6C 7D 8A 9B 10C 11A 12B 13C 14C 15C16C 17C 18A 19A 20B 21C 22C 23A 24A 25C

CHUYÊN ĐỀ 5 (THẦY PHIÊN)

RELATIVE CLAUSES,REDUCTION OF RELATIVE CLAUSES

(MỆNH ĐỀ QUAN HỆ -DẠNG THỨC RÚT NGẮN MỆNH ĐỀ QUAN HỆ)

* PHẦN I: LÝ THUYẾT

A. RELATIVE CLAUSES + Mệnh đề quan hệ (hay mệnh đề tính ngữ) bổ nghĩa cho danh từ đứng trước nó.+ Mệnh đề quan hệ được đặt sau danh từ mà nó bổ nghĩa, được bắt đầu bằng các đại từ quan hệ: WHO, WHOM, WHICH, THAT, WHOSE, và trạng từ quan hệ: WHERE, WHY, WHEN.

Danh từ đứng trước(Antecedent)

Chủ ngữ (Subject)

Tân ngữ(Object)

Sở hữu cách(Possesive Case)

Người (person) Who/That Whom/That WhoseVật (Thing) Which/That Which/That Of which/ whose

1. Đại từ quan hệ. (Relative Clauses)a. WHO: thay thế cho người, làm chủ từ trong MĐQH.

Ex: I need to meet the boy. The boy is my friend’s son. I need to meet the boy who is my friend’s son. The woman is standing over there. She is my sister. The woman who is standing over there is my sister.

b. WHO/ WHOM: thay thế cho người, làm túc từ trong MĐQH.Ex: I know the girl. I spoke to this girl. I know the girl who/ whom I spoke to . The man is my teacher. Your father is talking to him. The man who/ whom your father is talking to is my teacher.

c. WHICH: thay thế đồ vật, làm chủ từ, túc từ trong MĐQH.Ex: She works for a company. It makes cars She works for a company which makes cars . The elephants are big. People keep the elephants in iron cages. The elephants which people keep in iron cages are big.Thay thế cho cả mệnh đề đứng trước nóEx: He passed his exam. This pleased his parents. He passed his exam, which pleased his parents . (dùng dấu phẩy trước đại từ quan hệ)

d. THAT: thay thế cho WHO/ WHOM/ WHICH trong MĐQH hạn địnhEx: - I need to meet the boy that/ who is my friend’s son. - The woman that/ who is standing over there is my sister. - I know the girl that/ who/ whom I spoke to .

34

Page 36: letrungkien.edu.vnletrungkien.edu.vn/uploads/laws/tieng-anh-on-tap-thi... · Web viewPHONETICS NGỮ ÂM * PHẦN I: LÝ THUYẾT. A. PRONUNCIATION. I. NGUYÊN ÂM. 1. Giới thiệu

- The man that/ who/ whom your father is talking to is my teacher. - She works for a company that/ which makes cars . - The elephants that/ which people keep in iron cages are big.Chú ý (notes)Những trường hợp thường dùng THAT:* Sau cụm từ quan hệ vừa chỉ người và vật:Ex: - He told me the places and people that he had seen in London.* Sau đại từ bất định: something, anyone, nobody, everything,anything. . .và các từ: all, much, very, only. . Ex: - I’ll tell you something that is very interesting. - All that is mine is yours. - Answer all the questions that I asked. - You are the only person that can help us. * Sau so sánh nhất của tính từ, số thứ tự, first, lastEx: - This is the most beautiful dress that I have. - Paris is the finest city that I have ever seen.* Trong cấu trúc “It is/ It was . . . . that . . . .” (chính là . . .)Ex: It is my friend that wrote this sentence. (Chính là bạn tôi đã viết câu này.) It was he that killed the lion (Chính anh ấy đã giết con sư tử)

Những trường hợp không dùng THAT:* Không dùng trong mệnh đề tính từ không hạn định.Ex: Mr Brown, that we studied English with, is a very nice teacher. Mr Brown, who we studied English with, is a very nice teacher.* Không dùng sau giới từ.Ex: The house in that I was born is for sale. The house in which I was born is for sale.

e. WHOSE (OF WHICH): thay thế cho sở hữu của người, vật (his-, her-, its-, their-).Ex: John found the cat. Its leg was broken. John found the cat whose leg /(the leg of which) was broken. This is the student. I borrowed his book. This is the student whose book I borrowed .

f. OF WHICH / OF WHOM:Ex: Daisy has three brothers. All of them are teachers. Daisy has three brothers, all of whom are teachers. He asked me a lot of questions. I couldn’t answer most of them. He asked me a lot of questions, most of which I couldn’t answer.

g. Giới từ đặt trước mệnh đề tính ngữ: (WHOM/WHICH)Ex: The man speaks English very fast. I talked to him last night. The man to whom I talked last night speaks English very fast. The house is for sale. I was born in it. The house in which I was born is for sale.* LƯU Ý: KHÔNG dùng THAT sau giới từ.2. Trạng từ quan hệ. (Relative Adverbs)

a. WHERE (in/ on/ at ... which): thay thế cho cụm từ chỉ nơi chốn như: there, here, at that place, in this, in that. . .Ex: The movie theater is the place. We can see films at that place. The movie theater is the place where we can see films .

b. WHEN (in/ on which): thay thế cho cụm từ chỉ thời gian như: then, at that time, on that dayEx: Do you remember the day. We first met on that day.

35

Page 37: letrungkien.edu.vnletrungkien.edu.vn/uploads/laws/tieng-anh-on-tap-thi... · Web viewPHONETICS NGỮ ÂM * PHẦN I: LÝ THUYẾT. A. PRONUNCIATION. I. NGUYÊN ÂM. 1. Giới thiệu

Do you remember the day when we first met ?c. WHY (for which): thay thế cho cụm từ chỉ lí do như: reason, for that reason . . .

Ex: Tell me the reason. You are so sad for that reason. Tell me the reason why you are so sad.

CÓ 2 LOẠI MỆNH ĐỀ QUAN HỆRESTRICTIVE & NON-RESTRICTIVE RELATIVE CLAUSES

I. Restrictive Relative Clauses: (Mệnh đề hạn định)- Dùng để bổ nghĩa cho danh từ đứng trước chưa được xác định rõ, nếu bỏ đi mệnh đề chính sẽ không rõ nghĩa.Ex: I saw the girl. She helped us last week. I saw the girl who/that helped us last week.* LƯU Ý: Ta có thể bỏ đại từ quan hệ: WHO, WHOM, WHICH, THAT khi chúng làm tân ngữ trong MĐQH hạn định.II. Non-restritive Relative Clauses:(Mệnh đề không hạn định)- Dùng để bổ nghĩa cho danh từ đứng trước đã được xác định rõ (nó chỉ là phần giải thích thêm), nếu bỏ đi mệnh đề chính vẫn rõ nghĩa. - Mệnh đề này ngăn cách với mệnh đề chính bằng dấu phẩy.Ta dùng mệnh đề quan hệ không xác định khi:* Trước đại từ quan hệ có: this / that / these / those / my / her /his / . . .* Từ trước đại từ quan hệ là tên riêng, danh từ riêng, vật duy nhất, cụm trạng ngữ chỉ nơi chốnEx: My father is a doctor. He is fifty years old. My father, who is fifty years old, is a doctor. Mr. Brown is a very nice teacher. We studied English with him. Mr Brown, who we studied English with, is a very nice teacher. The sun made the traveller thirsty. It was hot at midday. The sun, which was hot at midday, made the traveller thirsty The boys in the next room are my students. They are making noise. The boys in the next room, who are making noise, are my students. * LƯU Ý: KHÔNG được bỏ đại từ quan hệ WHO, WHOM, WHICH,. . .trong MĐQH không hạn định.Ex: Mr Brown, we studied English with, is a very nice teacher. KHÔNG được dùng THAT trong MĐQH không hạn định.Ex: Mr Brown, that we studied English with, is a very nice teacher.B. REDUCTION OF RELATIVE CLAUSES (Rút gọn mệnh đề quan hệ)

1. Dùng phân từ:a. Dùng cụm V-ing:

Được dùng khi động từ chính trong MĐQH ở thể chủ động hoặc “Be”Ex: The man who is standing there is my brother. The man standing there is my brother Those people who are taking photos over there come from Sweden. Those people taking photos over there come from Sweden. Fans who want to buy tickets started queuing early. Fans wanting to buy tickets started queuing early.

b. Dùng cụm P.P: (V3/ V-ed)

Được dùng khi động từ chính trong MĐQH ở thể bị động.Ex: I like books which were written by Nguyen Du. I like books written by Nguyen Du. Most students who were punished last week are lazy. Most students punished last week are lazy.

36

Page 38: letrungkien.edu.vnletrungkien.edu.vn/uploads/laws/tieng-anh-on-tap-thi... · Web viewPHONETICS NGỮ ÂM * PHẦN I: LÝ THUYẾT. A. PRONUNCIATION. I. NGUYÊN ÂM. 1. Giới thiệu

2. Dùng cụm To-infinitive: (. . . Noun/ Pronoun + to-infinitive / to be + P.P. . . )Được dùng khi danh từ đứng trước (danh từ cần bổ sung nghĩa) có các từ sau đây: the only, the first, the second…., the next, the last, …… the + ADJ-est or the most + ADJ,……Ex: This is the only student who can do the problem. (động từ mang nghĩa chủ động) This is the only student to do the problem.Được dùng khi động từ là: HAVE Ex: I have something that I must do now. (động từ mang nghĩa chủ động) I have something to do now.Được dùng khi câu bắt đầu bằng: HERE (BE), THERE (BE)Ex: There are six letters which have to be written today. (động từ mang nghĩa bị động) There are six letters to be written today.

GHI NHỚ :Trong phần rút gọn thành To-infinitive này cần nhớ 2 điều sau:* Nếu chủ từ 2 mệnh đề khác nhau thì thêm cụm “for somebody” trước to-inf.Ex: We have some picture books that children can read. We have some picture books for children to read.* Tuy nhiên nếu chủ từ đó là đại từ có nghĩa chung chung như: we, you, everyone.... thì có thể không cần ghi ra.Ex: Studying abroad is the wonderful thing that we must think about. Studying abroad is the wonderful (for us) to think about.* Nếu trước ĐTQH (relative pronoun) có giới từ thì phải đem xuống cuối câu.Ex: We have a peg on which we can hang our coat. We have a peg to hang our coat on.

3. Dùng cụm danh từ (đồng cách danh từ )Được dùng khi mệnh đề quan hệ có dạng: “S + BE + DANH TỪ/CỤM DANH TỪ/CỤM GIỚI TỪ”

Cách làm: Ta bỏ who, which và be Ex: Football, which is a popular sport, is very good for health. Football, a popular sport, is very good for health. Do you like the book which is on the table? Do you like the book on the table? The books which are on that shelf are mine. The books on that shelf are mine.

PHƯƠNG PHÁP LÀM BÀI LOẠI RÚT GỌN:Bước 1: - Tìm xem mệnh đề tính từ nằm chổ nào

Bước này dễ vì mệnh đề tính từ thường bắt đầu bằng WHO,WHICH,THAT...Bước 2: - Bước này chủ yếu là rút gọn mệnh đề quan hệ thành cụm từ1. Nhìn xem mệnh đề có công thức “S + BE + CỤM DANH TỪ. . .” không? Nếu có ta

áp dụng công thức 3 (đồng cách danh từ).2. Nếu không có công thức đó thì xem tiếp trước who which . . . có các dấu hiệu first,

only, . . . . không, nếu có thì ta áp dụng công thức 2 (to-infinitive) lưu ý thêm xem 2 chủ từ có khác nhau không để dùng (for sb)

3. Nếu không có 2 trường hợp trên mới xét xem câu đó chủ động hay bị động mà dùng V-ing hay P.P.

* PHẦN II: BÀI TẬP TRẮC NGHIỆM (50 CÂU)

37

Page 39: letrungkien.edu.vnletrungkien.edu.vn/uploads/laws/tieng-anh-on-tap-thi... · Web viewPHONETICS NGỮ ÂM * PHẦN I: LÝ THUYẾT. A. PRONUNCIATION. I. NGUYÊN ÂM. 1. Giới thiệu

Choose the best answer.1. The boy to…………….I lent my money is poor.

A. that B. who C. whom D. B and C2. The knife………………….we cut bread is very sharp.

A. with that B. which C. with which D. that3. Cathy is trustworthy. She’s a person upon …………………you can always depend.

A. who B. whom C. that D. Ф4. The man ……….I introduced you to last night may be the next president of the

university.A. whom B. that C. o D. all are correct

5. Your career should focus on a field…………..you are genuinely interested.A. on which B. in which C. which D. that

6. The boy………………went to the hospital t ask for doctor’s help.A. whose sick sister B. whose sister - sickedC. who his sister is sick D. whose sister was sick

7. Fish have nostrils……..are used for smelling not to breathing as many people would believe.

A. they B. whom C. what D. that8. You gave me precious help……….I am extremely grateful.

A. to which B. for that C. to that D. for which9. The valley ……………the village locates is heavily polluted.

A. which B. in which C. in where D. at which10. These are the children………………………………………

A. whom I will look after B. after whom I will lookC. after who I will look D. which I will look after

11. Hanoi is a city the population………………………is large.A. it B. which C. who D. that

12. In my hometown, there is a park……………………..has a beautiful lake.A. where B. which C. in which D. in where

13. She has two sons. Both of…………………work abroadA. who B. whom C. them D. people

14. I met the waiters, several of……………..are university students.A. them B. who C. that D. whom

15. I bought 20 roses, three…………..were destroyed before I came home.A. of them B. among them C. among which D. of which

16. John, ………that his girlfriend went out with another guy, decided to say good bye to her.

A. believed B. believing C. to believe D. believe17. It is estimated that no more than 200 Siberian tigers………………in the wild.

A. lived B. leaving C. living D. left18. Can you find a place………………is suitable for all of us?

A. which B. where C. in which D. what19. The movie…………..we are talking about is fantastic.

A. which B. that C. Ф D. D. all are correct20. This is Bob, ………………..sister works for my father’s company.

A. that B. whose C. who’s D. whom21. The office……………we are working in………………..in bad shape.

A. where – is B. which – is C. in which – is D. in that – is22. The little girl ………………..I borrowed this pen has gone.

A. whose B. from who C. from that D. from whom

38

Page 40: letrungkien.edu.vnletrungkien.edu.vn/uploads/laws/tieng-anh-on-tap-thi... · Web viewPHONETICS NGỮ ÂM * PHẦN I: LÝ THUYẾT. A. PRONUNCIATION. I. NGUYÊN ÂM. 1. Giới thiệu

23. The farmers and their cattle……….had been tripped in the storm were fortunately rescued.

A. who B. whom C. which D. that24. Do you know that environmentalist……………………..?

A. with whom I used to work B. with that I used to workC. with I used to work D. with who I used to work

25. Rain forests influence the Greenhouse effect,………traps heat inside the Earth’s atmosphere.

A. that B. which C. where D. whose26. The local authority banned us from going near the forest…………there is a serious fire.

A. for which B. in that C. that D. where27. Did you listen to the lecture on the environment by Dr. Pike,………………..

A. whom I have ever told you about B. about that I have ever told you C. I have ever told you D. that I have ever told you

28. ……………..want to use rain forests are cutting them down without any hesitation.A. People who B. People which C. People whom D. Who

29. The man showed us the cage……………..he kept a fierce lion.A. which B. that C. in which D. in that

30. Those villagers…………..near the forest chop down hardwoods to sell for high prices.A. for whom to live B. live C. who live D. whom live

31. Atlanta is the city........ the Olympic Games were held in 1996.A. that B. when C. where D. which

32. The teacher notices the students ____ often come to class late.A. whom B. which C. who D. whose

33. The house in ____ I was born is for sale.A. which B. where C. that D. A & C are correct

34. What is the picture ____ you are looking atA. which B. when C. whose D. whom

35. That is the chair ____ he used to sit on for meals.A. which B. whose C. that D. A & C are correct

36. In the middle of the village, there is a well from ____ the villagers take water to drink.A. that B. which C. whom D. who

37. I must thank the people ____ I got the present from.A. who B. whom C. that D. All are correct

38. There is a NO PARKING sign ____ I did not take notice of.A. that B. which C. who D. A & B are correct

39. Ann, ____ lives next door, is very friendly.A. who B. whom C. that D. whose

40. The film was about Shakespeare, _________ plays are famous all over the world.A. which B. whose C. that D. who

41. The book___ I lent to him is very interesting.A. that B. whose C. whom D. who

42. The young boy ____ car was stolen called the police.A. that B. whose C. whom D. who

43. Did you see the woman_____ father was taken to the hospital?A. that B. whose C. whom D. who

44. That car, _____ I told you about, is very expensive.A. that B. whose C. whom D. which

45. Mr. Baker, ____ lives next to my door, will buy a new house.A. that B. whose C. whom D. who

46. The bed in____ he slept last night is really good.

39

Page 41: letrungkien.edu.vnletrungkien.edu.vn/uploads/laws/tieng-anh-on-tap-thi... · Web viewPHONETICS NGỮ ÂM * PHẦN I: LÝ THUYẾT. A. PRONUNCIATION. I. NGUYÊN ÂM. 1. Giới thiệu

A. that B. whose C. which D. who47. This is the only boy____ won the scholarship.

A. that B. whose C. whom D. which48. Is that the dictionary_____ you wanted to buy?

A. that B. which C. whom D. A & B are correct

49. A lot of fish___ live in polluted sea die every day.A. which B. whose C. whom D. who

50. The Nile, ____ is the home of a great variety of fish, is in Egypt.A. that B. which C. whom D. whose

* PHẦN III: ĐÁP ÁN

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20C C B D B D D A B A A C B D D A C B D B

21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40A D D A B D C A C C C C A A D B D D A B

41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50A B B D D C A D D A

CHUYÊN ĐỀ 6 (THẦY HIỂN)

REPORTED SPEECH(CÂU TƯỜNG THUẬT)

* PHẦN I: LÝ THUYẾT

A. Câu trực tiếp và câu gián tiếp (Direct and Reported speech):Giống: Luôn có 2 phần: mệnh đề tường thuật và lời nói trực tiếp hay lời nói gián tiếpEg: Tom says, “I go to college next summer” MĐTT Lời nói trực tiếp Tom says (that) he goes to college next summer MĐTT Lời nói gián tiếp Khác: a. Direct speech: Là lời nói được thuật lại đúng nguyên văn của người nói. Được viết giữa dấu trích hay ngoặc kép và ngăn cách với mệnh đề tường thuật bởi dấu phẩyeg: John said, “I like reading science books” The teacher said, “I’ll give you a test tomorrow”b. Reported speech / Indirect speech: Là lời nói được thuật lại với ý và từ của người thuật, nhưng vẫn giữ nguyên ý. Không bị ngăn cách bởi dấu phẩy hay dấu ngoặc kép, và luôn tận cùng bằng dấu chấm câu. Eg: John said (that) he liked reading science books The teacher said (that) he would give us a test the next dayB/ Các thay đổi trong câu gián tiếp

1. Thay đổi động từ tường thuật: Động từ tường thuật của lời nói trực tiếp phải được đổi phù hợp với

nghĩa hoặc cấu trúc câu của lời nói gián tiếp

40

Page 42: letrungkien.edu.vnletrungkien.edu.vn/uploads/laws/tieng-anh-on-tap-thi... · Web viewPHONETICS NGỮ ÂM * PHẦN I: LÝ THUYẾT. A. PRONUNCIATION. I. NGUYÊN ÂM. 1. Giới thiệu

Eg: He said, “Do you like coffee?” He asked me if I liked coffee

“If I were you, I’d not buy that coat,” said Mary Mary advised me not to buy the coat

Chú ý: SAY TO: không bao giờ được dùng ở lời nói gián tiếp. (phải đổi bằng TELL + (O))

TELL: không bao giờ được dùng ở lời nói trực tiếp.

2. Thay đổi các ngôi ( đại từ, tính từ, đại từ sở hữu):

VD: Mr Nam said to Hoa, “You take your book out and show it to me”

- Tình huống 1: Một người bạn của Hoa tường thuật với người bạn khác: Mr Nam told Hoa that she

took her book out and showed it to him.

- Tình huống 2: Hoa tường thuật với một người bạn khác: Mr Nam told me that I took my book out and

showed it to him

- Tình huống 3: Thầy Nam tường thuật với người khác: I told Hoa that she took her book out and

showed it to me

3. Thay đổi thời gian, địa điểm, các từ chỉ định

a. Từ chỉ thời gian

Câu trực tiếp Câu gián tiếp

- now

- an hour ago

- today

- tonight

- yesterday

- tomorrow

- Yesterday morning/ afternoon

- Tomorrow morning

- the day before yesterday

- the day after tomorrow

- last year

- next month

then, at that time, at once, immediately

an hour before/an hour earlier

that day

that night

the day before/the previous day

the next day/the following day

the previous morning/ afternoon

the next/following morning

two days before

(in) two days’ time

the year before/the previous year

the month after/the following month

b. Từ chỉ nơi chốn, địa điểm:

HERE THERE: Khi chỉ một địa điểm xác định

Eg: “Do you put the pen here?” he said He asked me if I put the pen there

HERE cụm từ thích hợp tùy theo nghĩa:

Eg: She said to me, “You sit here” She told me to sit next to her.

“Come here, John,” he said He told John to come over him.

c. Các đại từ chỉ định:

THIS/ THESE + từ chỉ thời gian THAT/THOSE

Eg: “They’re coming this evening,” he said. He said (that) they were coming that evening

THIS/THESE + danh từ THE

Eg: “Is this book yours?” said Mary Mary asked me if the book was mine

41

Page 43: letrungkien.edu.vnletrungkien.edu.vn/uploads/laws/tieng-anh-on-tap-thi... · Web viewPHONETICS NGỮ ÂM * PHẦN I: LÝ THUYẾT. A. PRONUNCIATION. I. NGUYÊN ÂM. 1. Giới thiệu

THIS/THESE: chỉ thị đại từ IT/ THEM

Eg: He said, “I like this” He said (that) he liked it

Ann said to Tom, “Please take these into my room” Ann asked Tom to take them into her room

4. Thay đổi thì của động từ

Các trường hợp thay đổi thì:

Khi các động từ tường thuật (say, tell, ask…) ở thì quá khứ, động từ trong câu gián tiếp phải lùi về quá

khứ một thì so với câu trực tiếp.

Câu trực tiếp Câu gián tiếp

Simple Present: “I don’t know this man”

Present Continuous: “I’m working for a

foreign company”

Present Perfect: “I’ve read a good book”

Present Perfect Continuous: “I have been

writing my report”.

Simple Past: “I finished my assignment”

Simple Future: “I will do it later”

Modal Verbs:

“I can work late today”

“I may see her tonight”

“I must/have to go now”

Simple Past: He said he didn’t know that man

Past Continuous: He said he was working for a foreign

company

Past Perfect: He said he had read a good book

Past Perfect Continuous: He said he had been writing

his report

Past Perfect: He said he had finished his assignment

Future in the past: He said he would do it later.

Past forms of modals:

He said he could work late that day

He said he might see her that night

He said he had to go then

Các trường hợp không thay đổi thì:

a. Khi động từ tường thuật (say, tell, ask…) ở thì hiện tại đơn, tương lai đơn hay hiện tại hoàn

thành:

Eg: He says, “I don’t know the answer to your question”

He says to me that he doesn’t know the answer to my question

They’ll say, “We’ll buy a new house” They’ll say (that) they will buy a new house

b. Khi động từ tường thuật (say, tell, ask…) ở thì quá khứ, động từ trong câu gián tiếp không đổi

thì trong các trường hợp sau :

- Tường thuật một sự thật hiển nhiên, một chân lý, định luật khoa học hay vật lý:

Eg: My teacher said, “Russia is the biggest country in the world”

My teacher said that Russia is the biggest country in the world

He said, “health is more precious than gold” He said (that) health is more precious than gold

- Được tường thuật ngay sau khi nói hay khi thuật lại sự kiện vẫn không đổi:

Eg: (In class): A: What did the teacher say?

B: He said (that) he wants us to do our homework

42

Page 44: letrungkien.edu.vnletrungkien.edu.vn/uploads/laws/tieng-anh-on-tap-thi... · Web viewPHONETICS NGỮ ÂM * PHẦN I: LÝ THUYẾT. A. PRONUNCIATION. I. NGUYÊN ÂM. 1. Giới thiệu

- Khi động từ trong câu trực tiếp là các động từ như: USED TO, hay các động từ khiếm khuyết:

COULD, WOULD, SHOULD, MIGHT, OUGHT TO, HAD TO, HAD BETTER

Eg: He said, “They might win the game” He said to me that they might win the game.

- Với MUST diễn tả lời khuyên:

Eg: “This book is very useful. You must read it”, Tom said to me.

Tom told me (that) the book was very useful and I must read it.

- Khi động từ trong câu trực tiếp ở các thì: Past Continuous, Past perfect, Past Perfect Continuous,

(nếu thì Simple Past đi kèm một thời gian cụ thể có thể không thay đổi thì).

Eg: He said, “I was eating when he called me” He told me he was eating when she called him.

- Khi tường thuật mệnh đề ước muốn (wish): theo sau động từ WISH, WOULD RATHER, IF ONLY

Eg: He said, “I wish I were richer” He told me he wished he were richer

She said, “I wish I had a good memory” She said she wished she had a good memory

- Các câu điều kiện loại 2, 3 (câu điều kiện không thật)

Eg: He said, “If I had time, I would help you” He said to me if he had time, he would help me

- Cấu trúc “It’s (high) time…”

Eg: He said, “It’s time we went” He said it was time they went.

He said, “It’s time we changed our way of working” He said (that) it was time they changed their

way of working.

C/ Các loại câu gián tiếp

1. Tường thuật câu trần thuật (statements)

- Dùng say hoặc tell để tường thuật

- Thường bắt đầu bằng: He said that…./ she said to me that…/ they told me that….,

eg: She said, “I’m happy to see you again”

She said that she was happy to see me again

She said to me that she was happy to see me again

She told me that she was happy to see me again

- Chú ý đổi thì, các đại từ, các từ chỉ thời gian, địa điểm…

2. Tường thuật câu hỏi (questions)

a. Đối với câu hỏi trực tiếp (Wh-question)

- Thường bắt đầu bằng: He asked (me) …/ He wanted to know…/ She wondered….

Eg: She asked, “What is his job?” She asked what his job was.

They asked me, “Where did you have lunch?” They asked me where I had lunch.

- Không đặt trợ động từ trước chủ ngữ như trong câu hỏi trực tiếp.

- Không đặt dấu chấm hỏi cuối câu.

- Thay đổi thì , đại từ, các từ chỉ thời gian, địa điểm…

b. Đối với câu hỏi “Yes – No” hoặc câu hỏi lựa chọn “Or”

- Phải thêm từ “if/whether” để mở đầu câu tường thuật

43

Page 45: letrungkien.edu.vnletrungkien.edu.vn/uploads/laws/tieng-anh-on-tap-thi... · Web viewPHONETICS NGỮ ÂM * PHẦN I: LÝ THUYẾT. A. PRONUNCIATION. I. NGUYÊN ÂM. 1. Giới thiệu

eg: She asked, “are you a teacher?” She asked him if/whether he was a teacher

They asked me, “Do you want to go or stay at home?” They asked me if/ whether I wanted to go

or stay at home.

- Câu hỏi đuôi được tường thuật giống câu hỏi Yes/No nhưng bỏ phần đuôi phía sau

eg: She asked, “You will stay here, won’t you?” She asked me if/whether I would stay there.

3. Câu tường thuật với “infinitive”:

a. Tường thuật câu mệnh lệnh, yêu cầu (Imperatives / Commands or Requests) dùng cấu trúc: tell/

ask/ request/ order somebody (not) to do something

Eg: “Read carefully before signing the contract,” he said. He told me to read carefully before signing the

contract)

“The commander said to his soldier, "Shoot!" The commander ordered his soldier to shoot.

“Please talk slightly,” they said. They requested us to talk slightly.

“Listen to me, please” He asked me to listen to him.

“Will you help me, please?” He asked me to help him.

“Will you lend me your dictionary?” He asked me to lend him my dictionary.

b. Tường thuật lời khuyên (Advice) dùng cấu trúc: advise somebody (not) to do something

Lời khuyên: - Had better, ought to, should, must

- Why don’t you + V?

- If I were you, I’d (not) + V…

Eg: “Why don’t you take a course in computer?” my teacher said to me.

My teacher advised me to take a course in computer.

c. Tường thuật lời mời (Invitation) dùng cấu trúc: invite somebody to do something

Eg: “Would you like to have breakfast with me?” Tom said to me. Tom invited me to have breakfast

with him.

d. Tường thuật lời cảnh báo (warn) dùng cấu trúc: warn somebody (not) to do something

“Don’t touch the red buttons,” said the mom to the child. The mom warns the child not to touch

the red buttons

e. Tường thuật lời nhắc nhở (reminders) dùng cấu trúc: remind somebody to do something

“Don’t forget to turn off the lights before leaving,” Sue told me Sue reminded me to turn off the lights

before leaving

f. Tường thuật lời động viên (encouragement) dùng cấu trúc: encourage / urge somebody to do something

“Go on, take part in the competition,” said my father My father encouraged me to take part in the

competition

g. Tường thuật lời cấu khẩn dùng cấu trúc: beg/implore somebody to do something

“Do me a favor, please,” said the servant to his master The servant begged/implored his master to do

him a favor.

h. Tường thuật lời đề nghị , tự nguyện (offers) dùng cấu trúc: offer to do something

44

Page 46: letrungkien.edu.vnletrungkien.edu.vn/uploads/laws/tieng-anh-on-tap-thi... · Web viewPHONETICS NGỮ ÂM * PHẦN I: LÝ THUYẾT. A. PRONUNCIATION. I. NGUYÊN ÂM. 1. Giới thiệu

Lời đề nghị: - Shall I + V

- Would you like me + to V

- Let me + V

Eg: Mary said to Ann, “Shall I get you a glass of orange juice?” Mary offered to get Anna a glass of

orange juice.

“Shall I bring you some tea?” He asked He offered to bring me some tea

i. Tường thuật lời hứa (Promises) dùng cấu trúc: promise (not) to do something

Eg: “I’ll give the book back to you tomorrow,” he said He promised to give the book back to me the

next day.

j. Tường thuật lời đe dọa (threat) dùng cấu trúc: threaten to do something.

“I’ll shot if you move,” said the robber The robber threatened to shoot if I moved

4. Câu tường thuật với “gerund”

Các cấu trúc của câu tường thuật với danh động từ:

S + V + V-ing: admit, deny, suggest…

S + V + preposition + V-ing: apologize for, complain about, confess to, insist on, object to, dream of,

think of…

S + V + O + preposition + V-ing: accuse..of, blame…for, congratulate…on, criticize…for, warn…

about/against, praise…for, thank…for, prevent…from…

Eg: “I’ve always wanted to study abroad,” he said. He’s dreaming of studying abroad.

“It’s nice of you to give me some fruit. Thanks,” Ann said to Mary Ann thanked Mary for giving her

some fruit

“I’m sorry, I’m late,” Tom said to the teacher. Tom apologized to the teacher for being late

“Shall we meet at the theater?” he asked He suggested meeting at the theater.

5. Câu cảm thán trong lời nói gián tiếpWhat a lovely dress! She exclaimed that the dress was lovely. She exclaimed that the dress was a lovely one. She exclaimed with admiration at the sight of the dress.

6. Các hình thức hỗn hợp trong lời nói gián tiếpShe said, “Can you play the piano?” and I said “no” She asked me if I could play the piano and I said that I could not

* PHẦN II: BÀI TẬP TRẮC NGHIỆM (50 CÂU)

A. Choose the correct answer among A , B C or D.1. “I wish..............eat vegetables”, he said.

A. my children will B. my children would C. whether my children would D. my children must

2. He wants to know whether I_____________ back tomorrow.A. come B. came C. will come D. would come

45

Page 47: letrungkien.edu.vnletrungkien.edu.vn/uploads/laws/tieng-anh-on-tap-thi... · Web viewPHONETICS NGỮ ÂM * PHẦN I: LÝ THUYẾT. A. PRONUNCIATION. I. NGUYÊN ÂM. 1. Giới thiệu

3. I wonder why he______________ love his family.A. doesn’t B. don’t C. didn’t D. hasn’t

4. He begged them --------------.A. help him B. should help him C. to help him D. help to him

5. Peter asked Jane why -------------- the film on T.V the previous night.A. didn’t she watch B. hadn’t she watched C. she doesn’t watch D. she hadn’t watched

6. He advised them -------------- in class.A. to not talk B. not to talk C. to talk not D. don’t talk

7. Some one was wondering if the taxi -------------- yet.A. had arrived B. arrived C. arrives D. has arrived

8. The government has announced that taxes --------------.A. would be raised B. had been raised C. were raised D. will be raised

9. He proved that the earth -------------- round the Sun. A. had gone B. was going C. goes D. would go

10. Claire wanted to know what time --------------.A. do the banks close B. the banks closed C. did the banks close D. the banks would close

11. Julia said that she ___________ there at noon. A. is going to be B. was going to be C. will be D. can be

12. He _______ that he was leaving that afternoon.A. told me B. told to me C. said me D. says to me

13. She said to me that she __________ to me the Sunday before.A. wrote B. had written C. was writing D. has written

14. Nam wanted to know what time ________.A. does the movie begin B. did the movie begin C. the movie begins D. the movie began

15. He asked me _______ Robert and I said I did not know _______.A. that did I know / who were he B. that I knew / who he had beenC. if I knew/ who he was D. whether I knew / who had he been

16. I asked Martha ______ to enter law school.A. was she planning B. is she planning C. if she was planning D. are you planning

17. I wondered_______ the right thing.A. whether I was doing B. if I am doing C. was I doing D. am I doing

18. Thu said she had been___________ the day before. A. here B. there C. in this place D. where19. Peter said that if he ________rich, he _________ a lot.

A. is – will travel B. were- would travelC. was – will travel C. been–would travel

20. They said that they had been driving through the desert__________.A. the previous day B. yesterday C. the last day D. Sunday previously

21. He asked the children _________too much noise.A. not to make B. not making C. don’t make D. if they don’t make

22. Laura said she had worked on the assignment since _______.A. yesterday B. two days ago C. the day before D. the next day

23. Mr Hawk told me that he would give me his answer the………..day A. previous B. following C. before D. last24. John said he _________ her since they ________ school.

A. hasn’t met–left B. hadn’t met-had left C. hadn’t met/ left D. didn’tmeet – left25. The woman asked __________get lunch at school.

A. can the children B. whether the children could C. if the children can D. could the children26. She said that when she_________ to school, she saw an accident.

A. was walking B. has walked C. had been walking D. has been walking27. He asked, “Why didn’t she take the final exam?” - He asked why __________ the final exam.

A. she took B. did she take C. she hadn’t taken D. she had taken 28. Peter said he__________ some good marks the semester before. A. gets B. got C. had gotten D. have got29. They told their parents that they___________ their best to do the test. A. try B. will try C. are trying D. would try30. Mary asked me where I___________ from.

46

Page 48: letrungkien.edu.vnletrungkien.edu.vn/uploads/laws/tieng-anh-on-tap-thi... · Web viewPHONETICS NGỮ ÂM * PHẦN I: LÝ THUYẾT. A. PRONUNCIATION. I. NGUYÊN ÂM. 1. Giới thiệu

A. came B. coming C. to come D. come31. She asked me _______ my holidays _______.

A. where I spent / the previous year B. where I had spent/ the previous yearC. where I spent / last year D. where did I spend / last year

32. He asked me who____________ the editor of that book. A. was B. were C. is D. has been33. Jason told me that he _______ his best in the exam the _______ day.

A. had done/ following B. will do/previous C. would do/ following D. was going/ previous34. The guest told the host that _______.

A. I must go now B. he must go now C. he had to go now D. he had to go then

B. Choose the sentence that is closest in meaning to each sentence below.35. '' Where did you go last night''? she said to her boyfriend.A. She asked her boyfriend where did he go last night.B. She asked her boyfriend where he went the night before.C. She asked her boyfriend where had he gone the night before.D. She asked her boyfriend where he had gone the night before.36. '' Remember to write to your aunt''. I said to Miss Linh.A. I said to Miss Linh remember to write to her aunt.B. I said to Miss Linh to remember to write to her aunt.C. I told Miss Linh remember to write to her aunt.D. I reminded Miss Linh to remember to write to her aunt.37. '' How long have you lived in Ha Noi''? said my friend.A. My friend asked me how long have I lived in HaNoi.B. My friend asked me how long had I lived in HaNoi.C. My friend asked me how long I had lived in HaNoi.D. My friend asked me how long I have lived in HaNoi.38. ''Close the books, please'' said our teacher.A. Close your book said by our teacher. B. Our teacher asked us close our book.C. Our teacher said us close our book. D. Our teacher asked us to close our book.39. “I didn’t break your watch” the boy said.A. The boy told the girl that he hadn’t broken her watch.B. The boy asked the girl that he hadn’t broken her watch.C. The boy told the girl that he didn’t break her watch.D. The boy told the girl that he hadn’t broken your watch.40. “Don’t make noise because I am listening music now” he said to me.A. He asked me not to make noise because I am listening music now.B. He asked me not to make noise because I was listening music then.C. He asked me not to make noise because he was listening music then.D. He asked me to make noise because I was listening music then.41. “I have just seen your mother this morning”. Laura said to Lewis.A. Laura told Lewis I have just seen your mother this morning.B. Laura told Lewis she had just seen his mother that morning.C. Laura told Lewis she has just seen his mother that morning.D. Laura told Lewis he had just seen her mother that morning.42. “We are ready to come with our friends” they said.A. They told us they are ready to come with their friends.B. They told us they were ready to come with our friends.C. They told us we were ready to come with our friends. D. They told us they were ready to come with their friends.43. “I was intending to meet you tomorrow” she said.A. She told me she was intending to meet me tomorrow.B. She told me she had intending to meet me the next day.C. She told me she had been intending to meet me tomorrow.D. She told me she had been intending to meet me the next day.

47

Page 49: letrungkien.edu.vnletrungkien.edu.vn/uploads/laws/tieng-anh-on-tap-thi... · Web viewPHONETICS NGỮ ÂM * PHẦN I: LÝ THUYẾT. A. PRONUNCIATION. I. NGUYÊN ÂM. 1. Giới thiệu

44. Mrs Smith: “ Don’t play in front of my windows” A. Mrs Smith told us not to play in front of her windows.B. Mrs Smith told us not to play in front of my windows.C. Mrs Smith told us to not play in front of her windows.D. Mrs Smith said us not to play in front of her windows.45. “I didn’t witness that accident.” A. He denied not having witnessed that accident. B. He denied having witnessed that accident.C. He denied not having witnessing that accident. D. He denied not had witnessed that accident.46. “You cheated in the exam.” The teacher said to his students A. The teacher insisted his students on cheating in the exam.B. The teacher prevented his students from cheating in the exam.C. The teacher advised his students to cheat in the exam.D. The teacher accused his students of cheating in the exam.47. " Don't forget to give the book back to Mary," he said to me.A. He reminded me to give the book back to Mary. B. He reminded me to forget to give the book back to Mary.C. He advised me to give the book back to Mary. D. He advised me to forget to give the book back to Mary.48."Would you like to go to the cinema with me tonight?" he said.A. He invited me to go to the cinema with him that night.       B. He offered me to go to the cinema with him tonight.C. He asked me if I'd like to go to the cinema with him tonight.D. He would like me to go to the cinema with him this night.49.'Remember to pick me up at 6 o'clock tomorrow afternoon," she said.A. She told me to remember to pick her up at 6 o'clock tomorrow afternoon.B. She reminded me to pick her up at 6 o'clock the following afternoon.C. She reminded me to remember to pick her up at 6 o'clock the next afternoon.D. She told me to pick her up at 6 o'clock the next day afternoon.50." Let's have a picnic next Saturday," Julia said.A.   Julia said that let's have a picnic the next Saturday.B.   Julia suggested having a picnic the following Saturday.C.   Julia advised how about having a picnic the next Saturday.D.   Julia told that why they didn't have a picnic next Saturday.

* PHẦN III: ĐÁP ÁN

1B 2C 3A 4C 5D 6B 7A 8B 9B 10B

11B 12A 13B 14D 15C 16 17A 18B 19B 20A

21A 22C 23B 24B 25B 26C 27C 28C 29D 30A

31B 32A 33C 34D 35D 36D 37C 38D 39C 40B

41B 42D 43D 44C 45B 46D 47A 48A 49B 50B

CHUYÊN ĐỀ 7 (CÔ DUYÊN)

COMPARISONS(SO SÁNH)

* PHẦN I: LÝ THUYẾT

Coù ba caáp ñoä so saùnh: So saùnh baèng, So saùnh hôn vaø So saùnh nhaát.I. Equal Comparison ( So saùnh baèng ) : 1. Short adjective and long adjective ( Tính töø ngaén vaø tính töø daøi ) :

48

Page 50: letrungkien.edu.vnletrungkien.edu.vn/uploads/laws/tieng-anh-on-tap-thi... · Web viewPHONETICS NGỮ ÂM * PHẦN I: LÝ THUYẾT. A. PRONUNCIATION. I. NGUYÊN ÂM. 1. Giới thiệu

S1 + be + as + Adj + as + S2 + ( be ) / O2

Ex1: My brother is as tall as I ( am ) / me.Ex2: In 1985, Lan was as beautiful as her mother ( was ).2. Short adverb and long adverb ( Traïng töø ngaén vaø traïng töø daøi ) :

S1 + V + as + Adv + as + S2 + ( Aux.) / O2

Ex1: He ran as fast as other students ( did ).Ex2: She sings as beautifully as some famous singers ( do ).II. Comparative ( So saùnh hôn ) : 1. Adjectives ( Tính tö ) ø : a. Short adjective ( Tính töø ngaén ) :

S1 + be + Adj-er + than + S2 + ( be ) / O2

Ex1: My brother is taller than I ( am ) / me.b. Long adjective ( Tính töø daøi ) :

S1 + be + more + Adj + than + S2 + ( be ) / O2

Ex2: In 1985, Lan was more beautiful than her mother ( was ).Ex3: A car is more expensive than a bicycle ( is ).2. Adverbs ( Traïng töø ) :a. Short adverb ( Traïng töø ngaén ) :

S1 + V + Adv-er + than + S2 + ( Aux. ) / O2

Ex1: He ran faster than other students ( did ).b. Long adverb ( Traïng töø da øi):

S1 + V + more + Adv + than + S2 + ( Aux. ) / O2

Ex2: She sings more beautifully than some famous singers ( do ).III. Superlative ( So saùnh nhaát ) : 1. Adjectives ( Tính tö ) ø : a. Short adjective ( Tính töø ngaén ) :

S + be + the + Adj-estEx1: He is the youngest in my class.b. Long adjective ( Tính töø daøi ) :

S + be + the + most + Adj

Ex2:This is the most difficult lesson in my book.2. Adverbs ( Traïng töø ) :a. Short adverb ( Traïng töø ngaén ) :

S + V + the + Adv-estEx1: That car ran fastest in 1976.b. Long adverb ( Traïng töø da øi):

Ex2: The bird sings the most beautifully.

49

S + V + the + most + Adv

Page 51: letrungkien.edu.vnletrungkien.edu.vn/uploads/laws/tieng-anh-on-tap-thi... · Web viewPHONETICS NGỮ ÂM * PHẦN I: LÝ THUYẾT. A. PRONUNCIATION. I. NGUYÊN ÂM. 1. Giới thiệu

IV. Comparisons with Adectives and adverbs ( Tính töø vaø traïng töø ôû ba caáp ñoä so saùnh ) :1. Adjectives: ( Tính tö ) ø :a. Regular Adjectives ( Tính töø hôïp qui taéc ) :

Adjectives Equality Comparative Superlative

Ngaén ( moät vaàn )fastlonggreen …

fasterlongergreener

fastestlongestgreenest

Daøi ( hai vaàn trôû leân )

beautifulcomfortableinteresting …

more beautifulmore comfortablemore interesting

most beautifulmost comfortable most interesting

b. Irregular Adjectives (Tính töø baát qui taéc):

Adjectives Equality Comparative Superlative1. good2. bad3.little4. many/much5. far6. old7. late

goodbadlittlemany/muchfaroldlate

betterworselessmorefarther/furtherolder/elderlater

bestworstleastmostfarthest/furthestoldest/eldestlatest

c. Two syllable adjectives (Tính töø hai aâm tieát ) taän cuøng vôùi -y, -ly, -ow, -le, -er, -ure, vaø moät soá tính töø thoâng thöôøng nhö quiet, polite, … thì thaønh laäp so saùnh hôn / so saùnh nhaát vôùi –er / -est, ngoaïi tröø guilty.

Adjectives Equality Comparative Superlative1. funny2. lively3. narrow4. simple5. clever6. secure

funnylivelynarrowsimplecleversecure

funnierliveliernarrowersimplercleverersecurer

funniestliveliestnarrowest simplest cleverestsecurest

2. Adverbs ( Traïng töø ) : a. Regular adverbs ( Traïng töø hôïp qui taéc ) :

Adjectives Equality Comparative Superlative

Ngaén ( moät vaàn )fastsoon

fastersooner

fastestsoonest

Daøi ( hai vaàn trôû leân )

slowlycarefully

more slowlymore carefully

most slowlymost carefully

b. Irregular adverbs (Traïng töø baát qui taéc):Adjectives Equality Comparative Superlative

1. well2. far3. badly4. late5. little6. much

wellfarbadlylatelittlemuch

betterfarther/ furtherworselaterlessmore

bestfarthest/ furthestworstlatestleastmost

c. Two syllable aderbs ( Traïng töø hai aâm tieát ) trôû leân ñöôïc thaønh laäp so saùnh hôn vaø so saùnh nhaát vôùi more / most, ngoaïi tröø traïng töø early.

50

Page 52: letrungkien.edu.vnletrungkien.edu.vn/uploads/laws/tieng-anh-on-tap-thi... · Web viewPHONETICS NGỮ ÂM * PHẦN I: LÝ THUYẾT. A. PRONUNCIATION. I. NGUYÊN ÂM. 1. Giới thiệu

* PHẦN II: BÀI TẬP TRẮC NGHIỆM (50 CÂU)

I. Choose the best answer A, B, C, or D to complete each sentence.1. Ms. Jones isn’t as nice …….. Ms. Smith.

A. as B. for C. like D. to2. The rooms in Graduate Towers are……….. Patterson Hall.

A. larger than B. larger than that ofC. larger than those in D. larger than in

3. She speaks English as……….as her friend does.A. good B. well C. better D. the best

4. Of three shirts, this one is the………….A. prettier B. more prettiest C. prettiest D. most pretty

5. My brother sang……… of all the pupils of the group.A. more beautifully B. the most beautifullyC. less beautifully D. most beautifully

6. At 3,810 meters above sea level in Bolivia stands Lake Titica, ………in the world.A. the highest large lake B. largest high lakeC. high largest D. the high largest lake

7. A: It’s a long way from Britian, isn’t it? B: Yes, but it isn’t as……….as Hong Kong.

A. far B. farther C. farthest D. further8. The larger the apartment, the................... the rent.

A. expensive B. more expensive C. expensively D. most expensive9. The faster we walk,………….. we will get there.

A. the soonest B. the soon C. the more soon D. the sooner10. “ Why did you buy these oranges? ” “They were ……….….. I could find. ”

A. cheapest B. cheapest onesC. the cheapest ones D. the most cheapest

11. Which woman are you going to vote for? –I ’m not sure. Everyone says that Joan is………….A. smarter B. the smarter C. more smarter D. more smart

12. Bill is ………………A. lazier and lazier B. more and more lazy

C. lazier and more lazy D. more lazy and lazier13. ………………..the time passes, …………….I feel ! The deadline of my thesis is coming, but I have just finished half of it.

A. The faster / the nervous B. The more fast / the nervousC. The fast / the more nervous D. The faster / the more nervous

14. China is the country with…………………..population.A. the larger B. the more large C. the largest D. the most

large15. She sat there quietly, but during all that time she was getting…………….Finally she exploded.

A. more and more angry D. the most angryB. the more angry C. angrier and angrier

16. For ……………….., it is certain that in the future some things will be very different.A. the better or the worse B. the good or the bad C. good or bad D. better or worse

17. ……… you study for these exams, …………. you will do.A. The harder / the better B. The more / the muchC. The hardest / the best D. The more hard / the more good

18. His house is _______ mine.A. twice as big as B. as twice big as C. as two times big as D. as big as twice

19. The more paper we save,…………preserved.A. more is wood pulp B. the more wood pulp isC. wood pulp is D. the much wood pulp is

20. ………I get to know Jim, the more I like him.A. For more B. More C. The more D. The most

51

Page 53: letrungkien.edu.vnletrungkien.edu.vn/uploads/laws/tieng-anh-on-tap-thi... · Web viewPHONETICS NGỮ ÂM * PHẦN I: LÝ THUYẾT. A. PRONUNCIATION. I. NGUYÊN ÂM. 1. Giới thiệu

21. The competition makes the price of goods……….A. most cheap and cheap B. cheaper and cheaperC. more cheap and more cheap D. cheaper and more cheaper

22. ……….the match was, the more spectators it attracted.A. The most interesting B. The best interestingC. The more interesting D. The interesting

23. ………..he worked, the more he earned.A. The more hard B. The hard C. The harder D. The hardest

24. The more running water you use,……………A. your bill will be higher B. will be higher your billC. the higher your bill will be D. the highest your bill will be

25.……………you study for these exams, ………..you will do. A. The harder/ the better B. The more / the much C. The hardest / the best D. The more hard / the more good26. My neighbour is driving me mad! It seems that………….it is at night , ……………he plays his music! A. the less / the more loud B. the less / less B. the more late / the more loudlier D. the later / the louder27. Peter is……………John. A. younger and more intelligent than B. more young and intelligent than C. more intelligent and younger than D. the more intelligent and younger than28. It gets…………..when the winter is coming. A. cold and cold B. the coldest and coldest C. colder and colder D. more and more cold29. French is a…………language to learn than English is. A. difficult B. more difficult C. most difficult D. more and more difficult30. Thanks to the great effort of doctors and nurses, her health is getting……………. A. worse B. better C. worse and worse D. better and betterII. Choose the underlined part among A, B, C, or D that needs correcting.31. Richard feels good than several days ago. A B C D32. Mary and Daisy are both intelligent students. Mary is so intelligent as Daisy.

A B C D33. He drives the car more dangerous than his brother does.

A B C D34. It was the most biggest building that I had ever seen. A B C D35. The Mekong is one of the longer river in the world. A B C D36. Many people believe that New York is the most great city in America. A B C D37. Jessica is only an amateur, but she sings well than most professionals. A B C D38. Lan is the more capable of the three girls who have tried out for the part in the play. A B C D39. The fastest you drive, the greater you get. A B C D40. The suitcase seemed to get heavy and heavier as I carried it along the road. A B C DIII. Choose one sentence that best rewrites the sentence given.41. They understand more than we do. A. We don’t understand as much as they do. B. We don’t understand anything at all. C. They understand everything inside out. D. They are very intelligent.42. It is much more difficult to speak English than to speak French.

A. To speak French is more difficult than to speak English.52

Page 54: letrungkien.edu.vnletrungkien.edu.vn/uploads/laws/tieng-anh-on-tap-thi... · Web viewPHONETICS NGỮ ÂM * PHẦN I: LÝ THUYẾT. A. PRONUNCIATION. I. NGUYÊN ÂM. 1. Giới thiệu

B. To speak English is more difficult than to speak French.C. Speaking English is more difficult than to speak French.D. Speaking French is not as difficult as to speaking English.

43. My interview lasted longer than yours.A. Your interview wasn’t as short as mine. B. Your interview was shorter than mine.C. Your interview was as long as mine. D. Your interview was longer than mine.

44. When I was younger, I used to go climbing more than I do now.A. Now I don’t go climbing anymore. B. I used to go climbing when I younger.C. Now I don’t go climbing as much as I did. D. I don’t like going climbing any more.

45. Your coffee is not as good as mine.A. Mine is better than yours. B. My coffee is better than your.C. My coffee is better than yours. D. My coffee is more good than yours.

46. I can’t cook as well as my mother does.A. My mother can cook better than I can. B. My mother can’t cook better than I can.C. My mother can cook well than I can. D. I can cook better than my mother

can.47. Murder is the most serious of all crimes.

A. Murder is very serious. B. No crime is more serious than murder.

C. Everyone is very afraid of murder. D. Murder is the dangerous crime.48. No one in this class as tall as peter.

A. Peter is taller than in this class. B. Peter is the tallest in this class.C. Peter is the most tall in this class. D. Peter is more tall than in this

class.49. This is the best music I have ever heard.

A. I’ve never heard better music than this. B. I‘ve ever heard such a good music as this.

C. This is the first time I‘ve heard this good music. D. I‘ve ever heard so good music as this.50. This is the most interesting novel I’ve ever read.

A. Knowing that the novel will be interesting, I read it.B. If only I had known the novel was so interesting, I’d have read it earlier.C. I don’t think it is the most interesting novel.D. I have never read a more interesting novel than this.

* PHẦN I I I : ĐÁP ÁN

1A 2C 3B 4C 5B 6A 7A 8B 9D 10C

11B 12A 13D 14C 15C 16D 17A 18A 19B 20C

21B 22C 23C 24C 25A 26D 27A 28C 29B 30D

31B 32C 33B 34B 35C 36C 37C 38A 39A 40B

41A 42B 43B 44C 45C 46A 47B 48B 49A 50D

CHUYÊN ĐỀ 8 (CÔ THẢO)

GERUND OR INFINITIVE(DANH ĐỘNG TỪ HAY ĐỘNG TỪ NGUYÊN MẪU)

53

Page 55: letrungkien.edu.vnletrungkien.edu.vn/uploads/laws/tieng-anh-on-tap-thi... · Web viewPHONETICS NGỮ ÂM * PHẦN I: LÝ THUYẾT. A. PRONUNCIATION. I. NGUYÊN ÂM. 1. Giới thiệu

* PHẦN I: LÝ THUYẾT

I. GERUND:1.Chức năng:

Là chủ ngữ của câu: Dancing bored him Bổ ngữ của động từ: Her hobby is painting Là bổ ngữ: Seeing is believing Sau giới từ: He is interested in watching films on TV Sau một vài động từ: Avoid, mind, enjoy,...

2.Một số cách dùng đặc biệt:a. Verb + V-ing: Danh động từ theo sau một số động từ:

Admit: thú nhậnAnticipate: trông mong, mong đợiAvoid: tránhAppreciate: tán thànhConsider: xem xẫtDelay: hoãn lạiDefer: trí hoãnDeny: từ chốiDetest: ghẫtDislike: không thìchDread: sợEnjoy: thìch thúEscape: trốn thoátExcuse: thứ lỗiFancy: đam mê

FinishForgive: tha thứLike: thìchLove: yêu thìchImagine: tưởng tượngInvolve: dình lìu, liên quanKeep: giữ, tiếpMind: phiềnMiss: lỡ, nhớMention: đề cậpPardon: tha thứ, tha lỗiPreferPrevent: ngăn ngừaPostpone: hoãn lạiPractice: thực hànhPrevent

Propose (= suggest)Quit: từ bỏRecollect: nhớ lạiResent: căm thùRecall: gợi nhớ/ recollectResume: cho rằngResist: kháng cự, ngăn cảnRisk: mạo hiểmRemember/ forgetSuggest: gợi ýStop/ begin/ startUnderstand: hiểuDiscuss: thảo luậnHate: ghétEx: He admitted taking the money.

Chú ý: excuse, forgive, pardon, prevent không trực tiếp theo sau bởi danh động từ mà theo sau bởi: Possessive adjective/ pronoun + danh động từ hoặc pronoun + preposition + danh động từAppreciate thường theo sau bởi tình từ sở hữu hoặc danh động từ ở dạng bị độngEx: Forgive my/ me ringing you up so early.Forgive me for ringing you up so early.You can‟t prevent his/ him spending his own money.You can‟t prevent him from spending his own money.You can‟t prevent him from spending his own money.b. common phrasal verbs + V-ing: (s u một số cụm động từ)carry on, end up, give up, go round, keep on, put off, set about…c. Expression + V-ing: Một số thành ngữ theo s u bởi V-ing - have fun/ a good time + V-ing: vui vẻ … - have trouble/ difficulty + V-ing:- have a hard time/ difficult time + V-ing- spend + time/ money + V-ing (present participle) He spends 3 hours studying English every day. - waste + time/money + V-ing:- sit + Danh từ nơi chốn + V-ing: she sat at her desk writing a letter- stand + danh từ nơi chốn + V-ing- lie + danh từ nơi chốn + Ving- can‘t help = can‘t bear = can‘t stand = can‘t resist (không thể chịu được)I can‟t bear hearing his liesI can‟t stand seeing him here- it is no good / it is no use (vô ìch / không có ìch): It‟s no use phoning him at this time- there‘s no point in …

54

Page 56: letrungkien.edu.vnletrungkien.edu.vn/uploads/laws/tieng-anh-on-tap-thi... · Web viewPHONETICS NGỮ ÂM * PHẦN I: LÝ THUYẾT. A. PRONUNCIATION. I. NGUYÊN ÂM. 1. Giới thiệu

- What‘s the point of…- to be busy bận rộnMy mother is busy cooking in the kitchen.- to be worth đángThis book is worth reading- be use to = get used to = be accustomed to : quen với- S + prefer + V-ing + to + V-ing: thìch làm gí hơn làm gí = S + would rather Vinf than Vinfd. go + gerund để chỉ một hoạt động đặc biệt nào đó: (Present participle)

- go fishing: đi câu cá- go shopping: đi mua sắm- go swimming: đi bơi- go hiking: đi bộ dã ngoại- go climbing: đi leo núi

-go hunting-go camping-go dancing-go birdwatching

 go bowlinggo jogginggo sightseeinggo sailinggo runninggo boatinggo canoening

3. The perfect gerund:Form: having VppThe perfect gerund được sử dụng thay the present form of gerund (V-ing) khi chúng ta đề cập tới một hành động đã hoàn tất trong quá khứ:Ex: He was accused of having stolen her money.He denied having been there.4. The passive gerund:Form: being + past participle (present)Having + been + Vpp (past)Ex: She hates being called a dull.

The mountain climbers are in danger of being killed by an avalanche. I am interested in being given money by my mother. He was punished by being sent to bed without any supper. The safe showed no signs of having been touched.

II. INFINITIVES: Động từ nguyên thể1. Chức năng:- Làm chủ ngữ của câu: (cùng với các động từ: appear, seem, be)Ex: To save money now seems impossible.= It seems impossible to save money (more usual)- Làm bổ ngữ của động từ (be):Ex: His plan is to keep the affair secret.- Làm tân ngữ của động từ:Ex: He wants to play- Chỉ mục đìch: He learns English to sing English songs.- Sau một số tình từ:2. Bare infinitive (infinitive without to)

Được dùng sau động từ make, have với nghĩ nguyên cớ (causative)

The Brown made their children clean their room.The guest had the porters carry their luggage upstairs.

Được dùng sau động từ giác quan như see, hear, feel,notice, taste, smell,....

We incidentally saw the plane crash into the moutain.The man noticed his assistant leave work earlier than usual.* chú ý:

55

Page 57: letrungkien.edu.vnletrungkien.edu.vn/uploads/laws/tieng-anh-on-tap-thi... · Web viewPHONETICS NGỮ ÂM * PHẦN I: LÝ THUYẾT. A. PRONUNCIATION. I. NGUYÊN ÂM. 1. Giới thiệu

Feel, hear, see, watch, smell, find + O + Ving (present participle): bắt gặp ai đó đang làm gìFeel, hear, see, watch, smell, find + O + bare inf.: thấy ai đó đã làm gì

Được dùng sau động từ let và help.

My brother let me use computer.The parents helped their children set up the tent.

Được dùng sau các đọng từ khuyết thiếu và trợ động từ: can, could, will, shall, would, should, used to, had better, need, ought to, do, did …

Trong cấu trúc: would rather + bare infinitve/ had better

3. To – infinitive:A. To infinitive sau động từ:Dạng 1: V + TO INFINITIVE : Một số động từ theo sau là to infinitive

1. agree: đồng ý2. aim: nhằm mục đìch3. appear: có vẻ4. arrange: sắp xếp5. ask: yêu cầu6. attempt: cố gắng7. bother: phiền8. care: để ý9. choose: chọn10. claim: công bố11. decide: quyết định12. demand: yêu cầu13. determine: định đoạt14. fail: thất bại15. guarantee: bảo đảm16. happen: xảy ra17. hesitate: do dự

18. hope: hy vọng19. learn: học20. manage: xoay xở21. neglect: lơ đãng22. offer: đề nghị23. plan: có kế hoạch24. prepare:chuẩn bị25. pretend: giả vờ26. proceed: tiếp nối27. promise:28. prove: chứng tỏ29. refuse: từ chối30. resolve: nhất quyết31. seem:32. swear: thề33. tend: có xu hướng34. threaten: dọa35. volunteer: tính nguyện

36. vow: dụ dỗ37. wish38. want39. need40. wait41. expect42. intend43. would like/ would love44. beg45. begin/ start46. afford: đủ khả năng47. be willing48. be able49. expect50. intend51. beg: cầu khẩn52. prefer

 

Dạng 2: V + O + TO INFINITIVE- Danh từ/ đại từ làm tân ngữ (objects) đi sau, rồi mới đến ―to infinitiveVì dụ:- She advised me to go to the English Club.* Một số động từ thường gặp:+ advise: khuyên+ allow: cho phẫp+ ask: yêu cầu.+ cause: gây ra.+ command: yêu cầu, ra lệnh+ encourage: khuyến khìch+ expect: mong chờ.+ forbid: cấm+ force: buộc+ instruct: chỉ dẫn+ invite: mời+ oblige: bắt buộc+ need: cần - We need you to help us

56

Page 58: letrungkien.edu.vnletrungkien.edu.vn/uploads/laws/tieng-anh-on-tap-thi... · Web viewPHONETICS NGỮ ÂM * PHẦN I: LÝ THUYẾT. A. PRONUNCIATION. I. NGUYÊN ÂM. 1. Giới thiệu

+ teach: dạy - My brother taught me to swim+ tell: bảo.+ want: muốn+ warn: cảnh báo+ remind: nhắc nhở+ order: yêu cầu, ra lệnh+ persuade: thuyết phục+ request: yêu cầu+ show:+ train: đào tạo, huấn luyện+ instruct: chỉ dẫn+ permit: cho phẫp+ remind: nhắc nhở

* NOTES:+ allow / permit / advise/ recommend/ encourage + object + to infinitiveEx: She doesn‟t llow me to smoke in her room+ allow/ permit/ recommend/ encourage/ advise + gerundEx: She doesn‟t llow smoking in her room

Dạng 3: V + TO INFINITIVE/ GERUND (một số động từ theo sau bởi to infinitive and gerund)Nhóm 1: V + to Infinitive / Gerund (không khác nghĩ )- begin bắt đầu- prefer thích.. hơn- can‘t stand- start bắt đầu- hate ghét- can‘t bear- continue tiếp tục- love yêu thích- intend- like thìch - bother làm phiềnCác động từ trên có thể được theo sau bởi to Infinitive hoặc Gerund mà ý nghĩa không đổi.Ví dụ:- He began to laugh = He began laughingChú ý:a) Không nên dùng: It‘s beginning rainingNên nói: It is begining to rainb) Động từ nguyên mẫu thường mang ý nghĩa của một mục đìch, một dự tình trong tương lai, trong khi danh động từ mang ý nghĩa một kinh nghiệm sẵn có. Cách sử dụng chúng đôi khi rất tinh tế như sau:Ví dụ- I like to meet the public(Tôi thìch gặp công chúng – Tôi thấy nên gặp, cần gặp → dự định)- I like meeting the public(Tôi thìch gặp công chúng. Tôi thấy vui khi gặp và tôi luôn làm thế).

Nhóm 2: V + infinitive / Gerund (khác nghĩ )remember, forget, regret, try, stop, need, go ona. NEED

57

Page 59: letrungkien.edu.vnletrungkien.edu.vn/uploads/laws/tieng-anh-on-tap-thi... · Web viewPHONETICS NGỮ ÂM * PHẦN I: LÝ THUYẾT. A. PRONUNCIATION. I. NGUYÊN ÂM. 1. Giới thiệu

Need to do = it is necessary to do:cần phải làm (động từ nguyên mẫu mang nghĩa chủ động)

Need doing = need to be done: cần phải được làm (động từ nguyên mẫu mang nghĩa bị động)

Tom needs to work harder. (It is necessary for Tom to work harder.) The grass in front of the house needs cutting. (The grass in front of the house needs to be

cut.)

b. STOP Stop to do = stop in order to do: dừng lại để làm việc khác Stop doing = not to do something any longer: dừng việc đang làm They stopped to look at the pictures. They stopped smoking because it is bad for their health.

c. REGRET/ REMEMBER/ FORGET:Remember/forget/regret + to V: nhớ/quên/tiếc sẽ phải làm gì (ở hiện tại tương lai)

Remember to send this letter (hãy nhớ gửi bức thư này). Don‟t forget to buy flowers (đừng quên mua hoa đấy)

I regret to inform you that the train was canceled (tôi rất tiếc phải báo tin cho anh rằng chuyến tầu đã bị hủy bỏ)

Remember/forget/regret + V-ing: nhớ/quên/tiếc đã làm gì (ở quá khứ)..I still remember paying her 2 dollars (tôi nhớ đã trả cô ấy 2 đô la).She will never forget meeting the Queen (cô ấy không bao giờ quên lần gặp nữ hoàng)He regrets leaving school early. It is the biggest mistake in his life.d. TRYTry to do: cố gắng làmTry doing: thử làm

She tries to pass the entrance exam to the college of pharmacy. I‘ve got a terrible headache. I try taking some aspirins but they didn‘t help.

e. GO ON:Go on doing s. th.: tiếp tục l m cùng một việc gì đó.Go on to do s. th.: l m hay nói việc gì khác

The Minister went on talking for two hours. We must change our ways. We can‘t go on living like this. After discussing the economy, the Minister went on to talk about foreign policy.

f. MEAN Mean + to V = intend to V: dự định làm gí đó Mean + V-ing = involve: bao gồm, bao hàm, có nghĩa là

B. To infinitive sau một số tính từ:Trong cấu trúc sau: IT + BE + ADJECTIVE + TO INFINITIVEVí dụ:

It‘s difficult to find their house Thật khó tím ra nhà của họ It‘s dangerous to drive fast Lái xe nhanh thí nguy hiểm. It‘s important to learn English Học tiếng Anh thí rất quan trọng

Có hai dạng tương đương như sau: = To infinitive + be + AdjectiveGerundVí dụ:

It‘s exciting to play football Chơi bóng đá thật thú vị.58

Page 60: letrungkien.edu.vnletrungkien.edu.vn/uploads/laws/tieng-anh-on-tap-thi... · Web viewPHONETICS NGỮ ÂM * PHẦN I: LÝ THUYẾT. A. PRONUNCIATION. I. NGUYÊN ÂM. 1. Giới thiệu

= to play football is exciting= playing football is exciting To infinitive sau 1 số tính từ: Able, unable, happy, delighted (vui vẻ), easy, lovely, glad,

sorry, eager (háo hức), amazed (ngạc nhiên), pleased (hài lòng), disappointed, surprised, willing (sẵn lòng), certain (chắc chắn)

Trong cấu trúc: S + be/ get/ look/ seem/ become... + too + Adj +(for O) + to infi. S + V (thường) + too + Adv +(for O) + to infi.

Ex: The water in this glass is too hot to drink.This coffee is too hot for me to drink.He runs too slowly to catch the bus.

S + be + Adj + enough (for O) + to infi. S + V (thường) + Adv + enough (for O) + to infi.

Ex: He is old enough to get married.He’s intelligent enough to get good marks.They speak slowly enough to understand.

so + adjective + as + infinitive

Ex: He was so foolish as to leave his car unlocked. It + cost/ t ke + O + to infinitive…

Ex: It would cost millions/ take years to rebuild the castle.

C. Sau một số từ để hỏi: Verb + how/what/when/where/ which/why + infinitiveNhững động từ sử dụng công thức này là ask, decide, discover, find out, forget, know, learn, remember, see, show + object, think, understand, want to know, wonder.Ex : He discovered how to open the safe.I found out where to buy fruit cheaply.She couldn‟t think what to sayI showed her which button to press.She wondered whether to write or phone.D. Chỉ mục đích:Ex: He tried to study hard in order to / so as to/ to pass every examE. Noun + to infinitive (replace a relative clause)Ex:

I have many things which I must do/ to do

She is always the last to go/ who goes

F. S + V + Đại từ bất định + To V(anywhere, anybody, anything, somebody, something, somewhere, nobody, nothing, nowhere, everything, everybody, everywhere)Ex:

Is there anywhere to go? He has got nothing to eat

G. Sau một số cụm từ sau:be about:định, sẽbe able: có thể

59

Page 61: letrungkien.edu.vnletrungkien.edu.vn/uploads/laws/tieng-anh-on-tap-thi... · Web viewPHONETICS NGỮ ÂM * PHẦN I: LÝ THUYẾT. A. PRONUNCIATION. I. NGUYÊN ÂM. 1. Giới thiệu

do one‘s best: cố gắngmake an/ every effort: nỗ lựcmake up one‘s mind: quyết địnhcan‘t affordEx: He is just about to leaveWe can’t afford to live in the centre

H. Thay cho một mệnh đề quan hệ:- Động từ nguyên thể có thể được sử dụng sau the first, the second..., the last, the only và thỉnh thoảng sau so sánh hơn nhấtEx: He loves parties; he is always the first who comes and the last who leaves.= He loves parties; he is always the first to come and the last to leaveHe is the second one to be killed in this way.

4. The perfect infinitive:+ Form: to have + Vpp+ Use:- Dùng với was/ were để diễn tả một kế hoạch chưa thực hiện đượcEx: The house was to have been ready today (but it isn‘t)- Dùng sau would/ would like để diễn tả một điều ước vẫn chưa hoàn thiệnEx: He would like to have seen it (but it was impossible)- Dùng với một số động từ: appear, happen, pretend, seem, believe, consider, find, know, report, say, suppose, think, understand…

III. PASSIVE INFINITIVE AND GERUND:+ Passive gerund: being + past participleEx:

She hates being called a dull. The mountain climbers are in danger of being killed by an avalanche. I am interested in being given money by my mother.

+ Passive infinitive: to be + past participleEx:

I hoped to be invited to the party. He refused to be taken to hospital. She doesn‟t want to be asked personal questions

Được dùng để nhấn mạnh hành động/ sự kiện hơn là tác nhân gây ra hành động

*PHẦN II: BÀI TẬP TRẮC NGHIỆM (50 CÂU)

INFINITIVEChoose the best answer A, B, C, or D to complete each sentence.1. My father usually helps me_______ English.

a. to learn b. lean c. learning d. both a and b2. He was heard_______ shout.

a. to b. of c. by d. at3. This student expected_______ the first winner of the Grand Prix.

a. be b. being c. to be d. will be4. I told her_______ about her wedding; everything will straighten out.

a. don't worry b. not to worry c. no worry d. not worry5. May I suggest you let_______

a. Mary doing so b. Mary do so c. Mary does to d. Mary to do so6. She_______ him when he called her.

60

Page 62: letrungkien.edu.vnletrungkien.edu.vn/uploads/laws/tieng-anh-on-tap-thi... · Web viewPHONETICS NGỮ ÂM * PHẦN I: LÝ THUYẾT. A. PRONUNCIATION. I. NGUYÊN ÂM. 1. Giới thiệu

a. pretended not hear b. pretended she heard notc. pretended not to hear d. did not pretend hear

7. The doctor advised_______ late.a. me not staying up b. me not stay up c. me not to stay up d. I did not stay up

8. The school superintendent told me_______a. hurrying up b. to hurry up c. hurry up d. hurried up

9. "_______us face the enemies", shouted the soldiers.a. Make b. Let c. Leave d. Keep

10. Mr. Brown told the schoolgirls_______ in class.a. don't ear b. not to eat c. eat not d. not eat

11. I have heard Dang Thai Son_______ the piano.a. played b. plays c. play d. to play

12. The young teachers wanted a Foreign Language Teaching workshop _______ in Ho Chi Minh City.a. to be holding b. should hold c. to be held d. to hold

13. _______able to take part in the international math contest two years from now, Son works very hard in his math lass.a. In order to be b. Being c. Been d. So that he be

14. Try_______ so many mistakes.a. not to make b. not make c. to make not d. make not

15. Let me_______ from you soon.a. to hear b. hear c. hearing d. heard

16. John is too stupid_______ understand this.a. to b. not to c. to not d. for

17. The wind is_______ to blow the roof off.a. strong enough b. too strong c. quiet strong d. very strong

18. My father is _______ to stay up late.a. too tired b. enough tired c. tired enough d. so tired

19. John wanted me_______ him.a. to be helping b. help c. to help d. I help

20. I want_______ early tomorrow morning.a. to leave b. leaving c. me leave d. me leaving

21. I hope_______a. to see you there b. seeing you there c. you to see there d. see you there

22. I taught_______a. how mending a shirt b. him how to mend a shirtc. how mend a shirt d. him how mend a shirt

23. I told_______a. Nam to come b. to come Nam c. to Nam come d. Nam come

24. My father has decided_______ a new house.a. find b. to find c. finding d. him find

25. Mother warned_______ the electric pluga. here not to touch b. her touching not c. her not touch d. not touch

GERUNDChoose the best answer A, B, C, or D to complete each sentence.26. He kept on_______

a. worked b. work c. working d. works27. She went to market without_______ anything.

a. buy b. to buy c. bought d. buying28. This article is worth_______ into your notebook.

a. copying b. copy c. to copy d. to be copied61

Page 63: letrungkien.edu.vnletrungkien.edu.vn/uploads/laws/tieng-anh-on-tap-thi... · Web viewPHONETICS NGỮ ÂM * PHẦN I: LÝ THUYẾT. A. PRONUNCIATION. I. NGUYÊN ÂM. 1. Giới thiệu

29. The boy denied_______ the glass window.a. to break b. breaking c. broke d. to break

30. These workers are accustomed to _______ at night.a. work b. working c. works d. be working

31. The criminal admitted_______ this innocent child.a. killed b. to kill c. killing d. had killed

32. Mrs. Ramsay was accustomed_______ in this rickety house.a. by living b. to living c. with living d. living

33. She has avoided_______ to me so far.a. being talked b. talk c. talking d. to talk

34. We should avoid_______ personal questions.a. asking b. ask c. to ask d. at asking

35. It is no use_______ over spilt milk.a. for crying b. in crying c. to cry d. crying

36. I intended to revenge him but my father prevented me_______ so.a. from doing b. not to do c. not do d. not doing

37. You should remember_______ for me.a. post b. posting c. to be posting d. to have posted

38. We object to_______ her like this.a. treat b. being treated c. treating d. be treated

39. I can’t help_______ anxious about the economic situation of our country.a. be b. feeling c. feel d. to feel

40. The nurse denied_______ the injection.a. give b. giving c. gave d. to give

41. Don’t stay in this bush to avoid_______ by snakes.a. bitten b. to be bitten c. being bitten d. bitting

42. I am looking forward to_______ my classmates again.a. seeing b. to be bitten c. being bitten d. see

43. It is necessary that you avoid_______ him during the working session.a. disturb b. to disturb c. disturbing d. disturbs

44. Are you considering_______ with us?a. to go b. going c. to have gone d. go

45. Your hair needs_______a. cut b. cutted c. cutting d. be cut

46. Haven't you started_______ the answer?a. write b. writing c. how to write d. them to write

47. These shoes need_______a. mending b. mend c. to mending d. to mend

48. Please excuse_______a. for being late b. me for being latec. me be late d. I am late

49. It's no good_______ me about your lost cat.a. to tell b. tell c. him tell d. telling

50. My younger brother takes pleasures in_______ his little sister.a. tease b. to tease c. teases d. teasing

* PHẦN I I I : ĐÁP ÁN

1D 2A 3C 4B 5B 6C 7C 8B 9B 10B62

Page 64: letrungkien.edu.vnletrungkien.edu.vn/uploads/laws/tieng-anh-on-tap-thi... · Web viewPHONETICS NGỮ ÂM * PHẦN I: LÝ THUYẾT. A. PRONUNCIATION. I. NGUYÊN ÂM. 1. Giới thiệu

11C 12C 13A 14A 15B 16A 17A 18A 19C 20A21A 22B 23A 24B 25A 26A 27A 28B 29C 30B31D 32C 33A 34A 35B 36C 37A 38A 39D 40B41C 42A 43C 44B 45C 46B 47A 48B 49D 50D

CHUYÊN ĐỀ 9 (CÔ THẢO) PREPOSITIONS

(GIỚI TỪ)

* PHẦN I: LÝ THUYẾT

I. Định Nghĩa:Giới từ là từ loại chỉ sự liên quan giữa các từ loại trong cụm từ, trong câu. Những từ thường đi sau giới từ là tân ngữ (Object), V-ing, Cụm danh từ …Ví dụ:She is sitting in the room.I don’t have interest in learning Chinese.II. Vị trí của giới từ:1. Sau “tobe”, trước danh từ:+ The book is on the bookshelf. = Quyển sách ở kệ.+ I will stay in Japan for 2 years. = Tôi sẽ ở lại Nhật 2 năm.2. Sau động từ:Có thể liền sau động từ, có thể bị 1 từ khác chen giữa động từ và giới từ.+ I live in Nha Trang = Tôi sống ở Nha Trang.+ She usually turns the air-conditioner on at night. = Cô ấy thường mở máy lạnh vào buổi tối.3. Sau tính từ:+ I’m very worried about my father’s illness. = Tôi rất lo lắng về bệnh tình của ba tôi.+ She is angry with him. = Cô ấy giận anh ta.III. Một số sai lầm mắc phải khi sử dụng giới từ:1) Suy luận từ cách dùng đã gặp trước đó:Ví dụ: Trước đó ta gặp : worry about : lo lắng về Lần sau gặp chữ : disscuss _____ ( thảo luận về ) thế là ta suy ra từ câu trên mà điền about vào, thế là sai.2) Không nhận ra là giới từ thay đổi vì thấy cùng một danh từ:Ví dụ:Trước đó ta gặp : in the morning Thế là khi gặp : ___ a cold winter morning, thấy morning nên chọn ngay in => sai ( đúng ra phải dùng on )3) Bị tiếng Việt ảnh hưởng:Ví dụ: Tiếng Việt nói: lịch sự với ai nên khi gặp : polite (lịch sự ) liền dùng ngay with ( với ) => sai ( đúng ra phải dùng to )IV. Hình thức của giới từ:1) Giới từ đơn (simple prepositions): Là giới từ có một chữ : in, at, on, for, from, to, under, over, with …2) Giới từ đôi (doubleprepositions): Là giới từ được tạo ra bằng cách hợp 2 giới từ đơn lại :Into, onto, upon, without, within, underneath, throughout, from among …3) Giới từ kép (compound prepositions): Là giới từ được tạo thành bằng tiếp đầu ngữ a hoặc be: About, among, across , amidst, above, against, Before, behind, beside, beyond, beneath, between, below…4) Giới từ do phân từ (participle prepositions): According to (tùy theo), during (trong khoảng), owing to (do ở), pending (trong khi) , saving = save = except (ngoại trừ),

63

Page 65: letrungkien.edu.vnletrungkien.edu.vn/uploads/laws/tieng-anh-on-tap-thi... · Web viewPHONETICS NGỮ ÂM * PHẦN I: LÝ THUYẾT. A. PRONUNCIATION. I. NGUYÊN ÂM. 1. Giới thiệu

notwithstanding ( mặc dù ) , past (hơn, qua) considering (xét theo), concerning/regarding/touching (về vấn đề, về), excepting = except (ngoại trừ)…5) Cụm từ được dùng như giới từ: Giới từ loại này bao gồm cả một cụm từ: Because of (bởi vì); By means of (do, bằng cách); In spite of (mặc dù); In opposition to (đối nghịch với ); On account of (bởi vì); In the place of (thay vì); In the event of (nếu mà); With a view to ( với ý định để); On behalf of ( thay mặt cho); -In view of ( xét về); With reference to (về vấn đề, liên hệ tới)…6) Giới từ trá hình: Đây là nhóm giới từ được ẩn trong hình thức khác: At 7 o’clock (o’ = of): Lúc 7 giờV. Các loại giới từ thường gặp:1) Giời từ chỉ thời gian:-At : vào lúc ( thường đi với giờ)-On : vào ( thường đi với ngày )-In : vào ( thường đi với tháng, năm, mùa, thế kỷ )-Before: trước -After : sau-During : ( trong khoảng) ( đi với danh từ chỉ thời gian )2) Giới từ chỉ nơi chốn:-At : tại ( dùng cho nơi chốn nhỏ như trường học, sân bay…)-In : trong (chỉ ở bên trong ) , ở (nơi chốn lớn thành phố, tỉnh ,quốc gia, châu lục…)-On,above,over : trên_On : ở trên nhưng chỉ tiếp xúc bề mặt.3) Giới từ chỉ sự chuyển dịch:-To, into, onto : dến+To: chỉ hướng tiếp cận tới người,vật,địa điểm.+Into: tiếp cận và vào bên trong vật,địa điểm đó+Onto: tiếp cận và tiếp xúc bề mặt,ở phía ngoài cùng của vật,địa điểm-From: chỉ nguồn gốc xuất xứ Ex: i come from vietnamese-Across : ngang qua Ex: He swims across the river. ( anh ta bơi ngang qua sông)-Along : dọc theo-Round,around,about: quanh4) Giới từ chỉ thể cách:-With : với-Without : không, không có-According to: theo-In spite of : mặc dù-Instead of : thay vì5) Giới từ chỉ mục đích:-To : để-In order to : để-For : dùm, dùm cho-Ví dụ: Let me do it for you : để tôi làm nó dùm cho bạn.-So as to: để6) Giới từ chỉ nguyên do:-Thanks to : nhờ ở-Through : do, vì-Because of : bởi vì-Owing to : nhờ ở, do ở--By means of : nhờ, bằng phương tiệnVI. Ý nghĩa của một số giới từ phổ biến:1/About:Xung quanh. Ví dụ: She looked about him :Cô ấy nhìn xung quanh anh ta.Khắp nơi, quanh quẩn. Ví dụ: He walked about the yard. hắn đi quanh sân.Khoảng chừng. Ví dụ: It takes about 5 minutes to the bus station : Tốn khoảng 5 phút để đến

64

Page 66: letrungkien.edu.vnletrungkien.edu.vn/uploads/laws/tieng-anh-on-tap-thi... · Web viewPHONETICS NGỮ ÂM * PHẦN I: LÝ THUYẾT. A. PRONUNCIATION. I. NGUYÊN ÂM. 1. Giới thiệu

trạm xe bus.Về. Ví dụ: What are you talking about? bạn đang nói về điều gì vậy?2/Against:Chống lại, trái với. Ví dụ: struggle against … đấu tranh chống lạiĐụng phải. Ví dụ: She drive against the wall : cố ấy lái xe đụng vách tường.Dựa vào. Ví dụ: He placed his guitar against the trunk : Anh ấy đặt ghi ta dựa vào gốc cây.So với. Ví dụ: The company now has 70 employees against 30 last years : công ty bây giờ có 70 nhân viên so với 40 nhân viên năm ngoáiChuẩn bị, dự trù. Ví dụ: She saved money against her business plan next month : cô ấy để dành tiền cho kế  hoạch kinh doanh tháng tới.3/At– Tại (nơi chốn).Ví dụ: The teacher is at the desk: cô giáo đang ở tại bàn làm việc.– Lúc (thời gian).Ví dụ: I get up at 6.00 : tôi thức dậy lúc 6 giờThành ngữ chỉ trạng thái.+At work : đang làm việc+At play : đang chơi+ At oen’s prayers : đang cầu nguyện+ At ease : thoải mái+ At war : đang có chiến tranh+ At peace : đang hòa bìnhThành ngữ chỉ chiều hướng.Ví dụ: -Rush at somebody : lao về phía aiPoint at : chỉ vào.Ví dụ: The teacher pointed at me : cô giáo chỉ vào tôi.Thành ngữ chỉ số lượng.Ví dụ: I estimated the class at 50 : tôi độ lớp học chừng 50 người.4/By:Kế bên, cạnh.Ví dụ: She sat by the river : cô ấy ngồi cạnh dòng sôngTrước.Ví dụ: You should be at the party by 9 pm : bạn nên đến buổi tiệc trước 9 giờ tối.Ngang qua.Ví dụ: I saw her passed by your house : tôi thấy cô ấy đi ngang nhà bạn.Bởi.Ví dụ: I was bitten by his dog: tôi bị cắn bởi con chó của anh ấy.Ở chổ.Ví dụ: He took me by the hand: anh ấy nắm lấy tay tôi.Theo.Ví dụ: Don’t judge people by their appearance: đừng phán xét người khác theo vẻ bề ngoài.5/ForVì , cho.Ví dụ: I save money for my children. Tôi dành tiền cho những đứa con tôi.Chỉ thời gian.Ví dụ: She has studied English for 2 years : cô ấy học tiếng Anh được 2 nămChỉ nguyên do.Ví dụ: I hate myself for being lazy : tôi ghét bản thân mình vì cứ lười biếngChỉ chiều hướng.Ví dụ: He left for Paris : Anh ấy đi ParisChỉ sự trao đổi.Ví dụ: I paid 10 dollar for that pair shoes : tôi đã trả 10 đô cho đôi giày đó.

65

Page 67: letrungkien.edu.vnletrungkien.edu.vn/uploads/laws/tieng-anh-on-tap-thi... · Web viewPHONETICS NGỮ ÂM * PHẦN I: LÝ THUYẾT. A. PRONUNCIATION. I. NGUYÊN ÂM. 1. Giới thiệu

6/FROMTừ (một nơi nào đó ).Ví dụ: She went from her house ( cô ấy đến từ nhà cô ấy)Chỉ nguồn gốc.Ví dụ: I am from Việt Nam ( tôi đến từ Việt Nam)Từ + thời gian.Ví dụ: From Tuesday to Sunday ( từ thứ ba đến chủ nhật)Chỉ sự khác biệt.Ví dụ: She looks different from others (cô ấy trông khác với những người còn lại )Chỉ nguyên nhân.Ví dụ: He suffers from bellyache : ( anh ấy bị đau bụng)7/InChỉ thời gian: in timeChỉ nơi chốn: in the streetBuổi : In the moningTừ tháng trở lên: in May , in spring, in 2008, in the 19th century.8/Chỉ trạng tháiBe in debt : mắc nợBe in good health : có sức khỏeBe in danger : bị nguy hiểmBe in bad health : hay đau yếuBe in good mood : đang vui vẻBe in tears : đang khócVII. Thành ngữ với giới từ-In such case :trong trường hợp như thế-In short, in brief : tóm lại-In fact : thật vậy-In other words : nói cách khác-In one word : nói tóm lại-In all: tổng cộng-In general : nói chung-In particular : nói riêng-Little by little : dần dần-Day by day : ngày qua ngày-Two by two : từng 2 cái một-By mistake : do nhầm lẫn.-Learn by heart : học thuộc lòng

VIII. Quy tắc hình tam giác trong giới từ

Quy tắc hình tam giác được biết tới như là 1 quy tắc giúp ghi nhớ cách dùng   giới từ   in, on,

at và cách sử dụng của chúng.

Ba giới từ chỉ thời gian, vị trí "in", "on", "at" rất dễ gây nhầm lẫn. Quy tắc hình phễu được khá

nhiều người sử dụng để giúp bạn giải quyết vấn đề này. Tưởng tượng cách sử dụng "in","on'',

"at" như một tam giác ngược, hoặc chiếc phếu. Chiếc phễu này lọc dần các cụm từ chỉ thời gian,

địa điểm với quy tắc giảm dần mức độ chung chung, tăng dần mức độ cụ thể.

66

Page 68: letrungkien.edu.vnletrungkien.edu.vn/uploads/laws/tieng-anh-on-tap-thi... · Web viewPHONETICS NGỮ ÂM * PHẦN I: LÝ THUYẾT. A. PRONUNCIATION. I. NGUYÊN ÂM. 1. Giới thiệu

In

To nhất của phễu là giành cho giới từ in - chỉ những thứ lớn nhất, chung chung nhất. Với thời

gian, "in" dùng trước những từ chỉ thời gian khái quát nhất như "century" (thế kỷ) cho đến

"week" (tuần).

Ví dụ: in the 20th century, in the 1980’s, in March, in the third week of April, in the future.

Ngoại lệ: in + buổi: in the morning, in the evening, in the afternoon

Về địa điểm, "in" dùng cho những địa điểm lớn như country (quốc gia), cho đến village,

neighborhoods (làng, vùng).

Ví dụ: In the United States, in Miami, in my neighborhood. "In" dùng thời gian từ chung nhất

cho đến week (tuần), địa điểm từ chung nhất cho đến thị trấn, làng xóm ngoại trừ in the

morning, afternoon, evening.

On

Phần giữa của phễu giành cho "on", tương ứng với địa điểm cụ thể hơn, thời gian chi tiết hơn so

với ""in". Về thời gian, "on" dùng cho ngày cụ thể, hoặc một dịp nào đó.

Ví dụ: on my birthday, on Saturday, on the weekend (United States), on June 8th.

Ngoại lệ: on my lunch break. Về địa điểm, "on" dùng cho một vùng tương đối dài, rộng như

đường phố, bãi biển...

Ví dụ: on Broadway Street, on the beach, on my street.

At

Phần chóp phễu, tương ứng với thời gian địa điểm cụ thể nhất, giành cho giới từ "at". Về thời

gian, "at" dùng cho mốc thời gian cụ thể, thời điểm, khoảnh khắc.

67

Page 69: letrungkien.edu.vnletrungkien.edu.vn/uploads/laws/tieng-anh-on-tap-thi... · Web viewPHONETICS NGỮ ÂM * PHẦN I: LÝ THUYẾT. A. PRONUNCIATION. I. NGUYÊN ÂM. 1. Giới thiệu

Ví dụ: at 9:00 PM, at lunch, at dinner, at the start of the party, at sunrise, at the start of the

movie, at the moment.

Ngoại lệ: at night. Về địa điểm, "at" dùng cho địa chỉ, địa điểm cụ thể.

Ví dụ: at 345 broadway street, at the store, at my house. Như vậy, cách dùng giới từ về thời

gian, địa điểm của ba giới từ "in", "on", "at" tuân theo quy tắc hình phễu, ngoại trừ một vài

ngoại lệ như trên.

* PHẦN II: BÀI TẬP TRẮC NGHIỆM (50 CÂU)

Choose the best answer A, B, C, or D to complete each sentence.1. She was very surprised________ the grade she received.

a. at b. on c. of d. about2. We might need more food, depending____ how many people turn up.

a. for b. on c. at d. wit3. Jane doesn't spend much money______ clothes.

a. over b. about c. at d. on4. She always takes good care_______ her children.

a. for b. in c. of d. with5. A sign warned motorists______ dangers.

a. of b. for c. about d. a and c6. They translated the letter ______ French.

a. for b. with c. into d. about7. I was disappointed________ the grade I received on my last essay.

a. for b. about c. to d. a and b8. The medical center is close ________ campus.

a. to b. for c. up d. with9. We went there_______ car and stayed there for the whole day.

a. in b. on c. with d. by10. We started our journey ______ foot.

a. with b. by c. on d. in11. He always prevents me_______ doing my duty.

a. of b. from c. with d. against12. I write letters _______ my right hand.

a. in b. by c. with d. at13. The war victims suffered terribly______ cold and hunger.

a. with b. from c. through d. of14. She is absent_______ class

a. at b. from c. to d. away15. It is very nice______ you to take so much trouble.

a. of b. to c. for d. from16. You may write________ pencil.

a. with b. by c. in d. on17. He congratulated me_______ winning the competition.

a. of b. on c. at d. about18. Remember me________ your parents.

a. to b. for c. with d. about19. Mr. Foster lives_____ 667E 76th street______ New York.

a. in/ in b. at/ in c. on/ in d. in/ on20. We reached______ her house safe and sound.

a. at b. to68

Page 70: letrungkien.edu.vnletrungkien.edu.vn/uploads/laws/tieng-anh-on-tap-thi... · Web viewPHONETICS NGỮ ÂM * PHẦN I: LÝ THUYẾT. A. PRONUNCIATION. I. NGUYÊN ÂM. 1. Giới thiệu

c. with d. no word is needed21. He insisted______ taking us dinner.

a. on b. in c. over d. of22. Do you believe_______ ghosts?

a. no preposition b. in c. on d. at23. Ed depends________ his family for financial support.

a. on b. in c. of d. at24. Ann looked______ the mirror and admired her new blouse.

a. in b. at c. on d. into25. The new manager's name is familiar_____ most of us.

a. as b. from c. to d. with26. Those books deal mainly_______ tropical plants.

a. with b. in c. for d. up27. _______ the game last evening, my cousin hurt his ankle.

a. For b. During c. Since d. From28. Water consists_____ oxygen and hydrogen.

a. about b. with c. on d. of29. There is an increasing demand_____ taller building in big cities.

a. with b. on c. for d. of30. Is the United States the wealthiest country______ the world?

a. of b. in c. for d. of31. When ______ Rome do as the Romans do.

a. with b. for c. in d. like32. This must be done_________ any price.

a. for b. at c. in d. with33. Your request_______ a scholarship has been taken into account.

a. for b. in c. under d. into34. He succeeded________ getting a scholarship.

a. in b. about c. for d. on35. Mark Twain based the story______his experience in the West.

a. on b. from c. in d. on36. We just rested_________ short time.

a. at b. since c. for d. in37. Don't put____ until tomorrow what you can do today.

a. away b. off c. aside d. up38. John Harcourt was ashamed_______ his father.

a. at b. with c. of d. about39. I prefer coffee______ tea.

a. than b. to c. from d. for40. If you don't know the meaning of the word, look it__ in the dictionary.

a. up b. on c. after d. for41. Washington State is famous______ its apples.

a. in b. for c. of d. with42. Was your choice of research topic acceptable _____ your instructor.

a. for b. to c. on d. upon43. People who are afraid___ heights are called acrophobes.

a. of b. on c. in d. to44. Water is essential_____ all life.

a. on b. for c. in d. with45. Were you aware_____ the regulations against smoking in this area?

a. in b. with c. of d. about46. Tepees are characteristic______ the Indian tribes of the Great Plants.

69

Page 71: letrungkien.edu.vnletrungkien.edu.vn/uploads/laws/tieng-anh-on-tap-thi... · Web viewPHONETICS NGỮ ÂM * PHẦN I: LÝ THUYẾT. A. PRONUNCIATION. I. NGUYÊN ÂM. 1. Giới thiệu

a. of b. upon c. from d. about47. Will this office be adequate____ your company's need?

a. on b. for c. to d. with48. I'm not familiar_______ that song.

a. to b. of c. with d. about49. One meter is approximately equal _______ a yard.

a. about b. on c. to d. with50. This movie is based________ a true story.

a. of b. at c. about d. on

* PHẦN III: ĐÁP ÁN

1A 2B 3D 4C 5D 6C 7B 8A 9D 10C

11B 12C 13B 14B 15A 16C 17B 18A 19B 20D

21A 22B 23A 24A 25C 26A 27B 28D 29C 30B

31C 32B 33A 34A 35D 36C 37B 38C 39B 40A

41B 42B 43A 44B 45C 46A 47B 48C 49C 50D

CHUYÊN ĐỀ 10 (CÔ TRÂM)

INVERSION(ĐẢO NGƯ TRONG TIẾNG ANH)

S u t m & biên so n: Cô Tr n Th Quỳnh Trâm – Tr ng THPT Lê Trung Kiên (Sđt: 0905 998 109)ư ầ ạ ầ ị ườ

* PHẦN I: LÝ THUYẾT

I. MỤC ĐÍCH CHUYÊN ĐỀ Chuyên đề này sẽ giới thiệu một số dạng đảo ngữ thường gặp.

II. KIẾN THỨC CƠ BẢNA. Định nghĩa Trong một số trường hợp các phó t ừ không đứng ở vị trí bình thường của nó mà đảo lên đứng ở đầu câu nh ằm nhấn mạnh vào hành động của chủ ngữ. Người ta gọi đó là câu đảo ngữ. Trong trường hợp đó ngữ pháp sẽ thay đổi, đằng sau phó t ừ đứng đầu câu là tr ợ động từ r ồi mới đến chủ ngữ và động t ừ chính .

Phó từ + trợ động từ + chủ ngữ + động từ chính(Adv of phrase + Vauxiliary + S + V …)

Examples:I little knew that he was a compulsive liar.

= Little did I know that he was a compulsive liar.

I have never seen him looking so miserable before.= Never before have I seen him looking so miserable.

You can only understand it when you grow up.

70

Page 72: letrungkien.edu.vnletrungkien.edu.vn/uploads/laws/tieng-anh-on-tap-thi... · Web viewPHONETICS NGỮ ÂM * PHẦN I: LÝ THUYẾT. A. PRONUNCIATION. I. NGUYÊN ÂM. 1. Giới thiệu

= Only when you grow up, can you understand it.

Tóm lại, Đảo ngữ là đảo động từ tới trước chủ ngữ (theo dạng thức nghi vấn).

B. Các dạng đảo ngữ thường gặp 1. Câu đảo ngữ có chứa trạng từ, cụm từ mang nghĩa phủ định

Never = At no time, Never before, Never in my life, Seldom = Rarely, Hardly ever

E.g: We can never live without air and water.Never can we live without air and water. (Không bao giờ chúng ta có thể sống được nếu không có không khí và nước).

Not a single word, Little, No longer, Neither …E.g: Not a single word did she leave. (=She left without a single word.)

Under no circumstances (dù bất kỳ hoàn cảnh nào), On no accounts (dù bất kỳ lý do gì), In no way (k đời nào), By no means (hoàn toàn k)

E.g: Under no circumstances should you lend him the money. (= You should never lend him the money under any circumstances.)

On no account m ust this switch be touched. (This switch mustn’t be touched on any account.)

Not only … but also ...; Not only … but … as well.E.g.: Not only does Lan study well, but she also sings beautifully. (Lan not only studies well, but she sings beautifully as well.)

Barely/ Hardly/ Scarcely … when …; No sooner … than … E.g.: Hardly had he fallen asleep when he began to dream of far-way lands. (= He had hardly fallen asleep when he began to dream of far-way lands.)

2. Câu đảo ngữ với ONLY: Only after, Only when = Not until, Only if …

E.g: Only if you tell me the truth, can I forgive you.Only after the film started did I rea l i s e that I'd seen it before.Only when Alex was 12, did he meet his long-lost brother. (= It was not until Alex was

12 that he met his long-lost brother.)

Chú ý: đối với dạng này, đảo ngữ ở vế sau (mệnh đề chính) Only then = Only later, Only in this way, Only by + Ving, …

E.g.: Only then did I understand the problem.Only by studying hard can you pass this exam.

3. Đảo ngữ với SO … THAT; SUCH … THAT … So + Adj/Adv

E.g.: She is so rich that she can buy what she likes So rich is she that she can buy what she likes.

71

Page 73: letrungkien.edu.vnletrungkien.edu.vn/uploads/laws/tieng-anh-on-tap-thi... · Web viewPHONETICS NGỮ ÂM * PHẦN I: LÝ THUYẾT. A. PRONUNCIATION. I. NGUYÊN ÂM. 1. Giới thiệu

E.g: He worked so hard in the past that he is now weak. So hard did he work in the past that he is now weak.

Such + be + N + that + …E.g: The question was so great that he had to think it over.

Such was the question that he had to think it over.E.g.: The novel is so interesting that Jane can’t put it down. (= It is such an interesting novel that Jane can’t put it down.)

Such is the interesting novel that Jane can’t put it down. 4. Đảo từ với câu điều kiện:4.1. Đảo từ với câu điều kiện loại 1Đảo “should” lên đầu câu thay “If”Eg: If it should rain tonight, I will stay at home.

Should it rain tonight, I will stay at home.SHOULD + S + V0 …, S + (will/ can) + V…

4.2. Điều kiện loại 2 Câu điều kiện loại 2 với động từ tobe (was/ were)

E.g: If I were you, I would marry her.Were I you I would marry her.

E.g: If it weren’t for your progress, I wouldn’t be hereWere it not your progress, I wouldn’t be here.

WERE + S + (not) + N.P/ Pro, S + would/could + V0 …

Câu điều kiện loại 2 với động từ thườngE.g: If Mary had a lot of money, she would buy a new car.

Were Mary to have a lot of money, she would buy a new car.

WERE + S + (not) + TO V0 …, S + would/could + V0 …4.3. Điều kiện loại 3

Đảo “Had” lên đầu câu thay “If”Eg: If she had worked harder last year, she wouldn’t have failed the exam.

Had she worked harder last year, she wouldn’t have failed the exam.Eg: If it hadn’t been for hot weather, we would have had a wonderful holiday

Had it not been for hot weather, we would have had a wonderful holiday

HAD + S + (not) + V3/-ed …, S + would/could have + V3/-ed …5. Câu đảo ngữ với (cụm) trạng từ chỉ nơi chốn, vị trí, trật tự

In front of the museum i s a statue. (= A statue is in front of the museum.)First ca m e the ambulance, then ca m e the police.(Thoạt đầu là xe cứu thương chạy đến, tiếp sau là cảnh sát.)

Khi một ngữ g i ới t ừ làm phó t ừ ch ỉ địa điểm hoặc phương hướng đứng ở đầu câu, các nội động t ừ đặt lên trước chủ ngữ nhưng tuyệt đối KHÔNG được sử dụng tr ợ đ ộ ng t ừ

72

Page 74: letrungkien.edu.vnletrungkien.edu.vn/uploads/laws/tieng-anh-on-tap-thi... · Web viewPHONETICS NGỮ ÂM * PHẦN I: LÝ THUYẾT. A. PRONUNCIATION. I. NGUYÊN ÂM. 1. Giới thiệu

trong l o ại câu này . Nó rất phổ biến trong văn mô tả khi muốn diễn đạt một chủ ngữ không xác định:

Under the tree was lying one of the biggest men I had ever seen. Directly in front of them stood a great castle.

On the grass sat an enormous frog.Along the road ca m e a strange procession.

(Tham khảo thêm ở https://www.facebook.com/notes/h%E1%BB%8Dc-to%C3%A1n-th%E1%BA%A7y-ch%C3%AD-luy%E1%BB%87n-thi-%C4%91h-10-11-12/inversion-%C4%91%E1%BA%A3o-ng%E1%BB%AF-haemi-/652949088065863/)

* PHẦN II: BÀI TẬP TRẮC NGHIỆM (50 CÂU)

Choose the best answer A, B, C, or D to complete each sentence.1. ___________ his terrible secret.

A. Did they learn only later B. Only later did they learnC. Only later they learnt D. Only later they did learn

2. By the gate __________.A. a little girl stood B. stood a little girl C. did a little girl stand D. a little girl did stand

3. Scarcely __________ out of the bed when _________.A. had I got / did the doorbell ring B. had I got / the doorbell rangC. I had got / did the doorbell ring D. I had got / the doorbell rang

4. Not a single word __________.A. said she B. she says C. did she say D. she said

5. Only after the film started __________ that __________ it before.A. I realized / I had seen B. did I realize / I had seenC. I realized / had I seen D. did I realize / had I seen

6. _________ will we let you live independently.A. Not until do you grow up B. Until you grow up C. Until do you grow up D. Not until you grow up

7. Not until a monkey is several years old __________ to exhibit signs of independence from its mother.A. it begins B. does it begin C. and begin D. is it begin

8. __________ did Jerome accept the job.A. Only because it was an interesting work. B. Because it was an interesting work.

C. Only because it was an interested work. D. The work was interesting.9. __________ great was the destruction that the south took decades to recovered.

A. Very B. too C. Such D. So10. __________ when The Charges found themselves 7-0 down.

A. Hardly had the games begun B. Hardly the games had begunC. The games had hardly begun D. Hardly had begun the games

11. Not until the first land plants developed __________.A. land animals appeared B. did land animals appearC. would land animals appear D. the land animals appeared

73

Page 75: letrungkien.edu.vnletrungkien.edu.vn/uploads/laws/tieng-anh-on-tap-thi... · Web viewPHONETICS NGỮ ÂM * PHẦN I: LÝ THUYẾT. A. PRONUNCIATION. I. NGUYÊN ÂM. 1. Giới thiệu

12. Not until it was too late __________ I call Susan.A. I remembered B. did I remember C. did I remembered D. I did remember

13. Never before __________ such a wonderful child.A. I have seen B. I had seen C. I saw D. have I seen

14. Hardly had we settle down in our seats __________ the lights went out.A. than B. when C. then D. after

15. Only after checking three times __________ certain of the answer. Jim promised that never would he tell anyone else.A. I was B. was I C. were I D. I were

16. Only when he is here, __________. A. he speaks English B. does he speak EnglishC. he can speak English D. he does speak English

17. Never ________ me again. A. will she love B. she loves C. she won't love D. she will love

18. Not only_______ but she is also very intelligent A. she is beautiful B. beautiful she is C. is she beautiful D. beautiful is she

19. No sooner___________ out than it rained. A. did I go B. I went C. had I gone D. I had gone

20. Seldom___________ the guitar. A. he plays B. does he play C. he doesn't play D. he does play

21. Hardly___________a word whether her son came back. A. couldn't she say B. she could say C. she couldn't say D. could she say

22. Often ___________ a meeting. A. do we have B. we do have C. have we D. we have

23. Many a time___________ he wants to maary me. A. said he B. he said C. has he said D. he has said

24. Only at weekend___________ my kids to Water Park. A. I don't take B. do I take C. I take D. I do take

25. So old ___________ that she couldn't dance. A. she wasn't B. she was C. wasn't she D. was she

26. _______ here yesterday, you would have met me. A. Were you B. you were C. Had you been D. You had been

27. On the battle field___________ A. the tanks did lie B. the tanks lay C. did the tanks lie D. lay the tanks

28. At no time___________ greater opportunities. A. did women had B. has women had C. does women have D. have women had

29. Not once________ into her eyes. A. he looked B. does he looked C. did he look D. looked he

30. ___________ has the work been so easy. A. Never B. Only by C. When D. For

31. Now here___________ such cooperative staff. A. you can find B. you found C. you could find D. can you find

32. Never before___________ in an carnet attempt to resolve their differences. A. have the leaders of these two countries met B. the leaders of these two countries have met C. have the leaders of these two countries meet D. met the leaders of these two countries

33. Seldom___________ a newspaper. 74

Page 76: letrungkien.edu.vnletrungkien.edu.vn/uploads/laws/tieng-anh-on-tap-thi... · Web viewPHONETICS NGỮ ÂM * PHẦN I: LÝ THUYẾT. A. PRONUNCIATION. I. NGUYÊN ÂM. 1. Giới thiệu

A. buys Anna B. does Anna buy C. bought Anna D. Anna does buy 34. Not only__________ at the post office, ___________ at the grocery store.

A. does Mary work/but she also works B. works Mary/but she also works C. does Mary work/but does she also work D. works Mary/but does she also work

35. No sooner___________ the house than the phone started to ring. A. had she entered B. she had entered C. entered she D. had entered she

36. On a hill in front of them___________ a great castle. A. standing B. stand C. to stand D. stood

37. "This store has such high prices". - "I agree. Never again___________ here". A. I will shop B. will I shop C. I do shop D. shop I

38. "Is this machine often in need of repair?" - "No. ___________ problems to arise". A. Seldom don't we expect B. We expect seldom C. Seldom we expect D. Seldom do we expect

39. "I can't see the stage very well from here". - "___________" A. Neither can't I B. Neither I can C. I can't neither D. Neither can I

40. Not until the early 1900s___________ to vote in the United States. A. women were allowed B. were women allowed C. they allowed women D. when women were allowed

41. Only recently___________ a favourite sport in the United States. A. has jogging become B. has become jogging C. when jogging became D. as jogging has become

42. "This is one of the oldest trees in the world" - "___________ such a big tree". A. Never I have seen B. I haven't never seen C. Never have I seen D. I have seen never

43. "What happened to Jean's new car?" - "No sooner__________ it than someone ran into her" A. had she bought B. she bought C. did she bought D. she had bought

44. "I would like to apply for the sales position you advertised" "I'm sorry. No longer___________ applications for that position".

A. are taking we B. we are taking C. are we taking D. we taking 45. ___________ a higher concentration of people than in Tokyo and Mexico City.

A. Nowhere there is B. Nowhere is C. Nowhere is there D. Nowhere there isn't 46. "Did you like your trip Niagara Falls?"

"It was beautiful. Hardly ever ___________ such a spectacular sight". A. can see you B. can you see C. see you D. you can see

47. "Can children swim in this pool?" - "Yes. However, at no time___________ alone". A. shouldn't they swim B. they should swim C. should swim they D. should they swim

48. Nowhere else___________ A. they can go B. can they go C. they can't go D. can't they go

49. Only when at home___________ her children A. does she scold B. she scolds C. has she scolded D. she has scolded

50. Not a penny___________ me. A. did he give B. he gave C. he has given D. he has gave

75

Page 77: letrungkien.edu.vnletrungkien.edu.vn/uploads/laws/tieng-anh-on-tap-thi... · Web viewPHONETICS NGỮ ÂM * PHẦN I: LÝ THUYẾT. A. PRONUNCIATION. I. NGUYÊN ÂM. 1. Giới thiệu

* PHẦN III: ĐÁP ÁN

1B 2B 3B 4C 5B 6D 7B 8A 9D 10A

11B 12B 13D 14B 15B 16B 17A 18C 19C 20B

21D 22A 23C 24B 25D 26C 27D 28D 29C 30A

31A 32A 33B 34A 35A 36D 37B 38D 39D 40B

41A 42C 43A 44C 45C 46B 47D 48B 49A 50A

CHUYÊN ĐỀ 11 (THẦY ĐIỀN)

PHRASAL VERBS(CỤM ĐỘNG TỪ)

* PHẦN I: LÝ THUYẾT

Phrasal verbs are used more frequently in everyday speech than in formal writing/ speaking. They are used often in everyday conversation by native speakers of English.- account for do, vì - bear out = confirm xác nhận- blow out dập tắt lửa - break down hư hỏng, phá vỡ- break into đột nhập - break out bùng nổ, bùng phát- bring in = introduce giới thiệu - bring up = raise nuôi nấng- burn down thiêu trụi - call for ghé qua- call in ghé thăm - call of = cancel hủy bỏ- call on = visit thăm - call up = telephone gọi điện- carry on = continue tiếp tục - carry out = execute tiến hành- catch up with bắt kịp - clear up = tidy dọn dẹp- close down đóng cửa - come about = happen xảy ra- come across tình cờ gặp ai - come off = succeed thành công- come along / on nhanh lên - come over ghé nhà- come up xảy ra, xuất hiện - count on / upon tin vào, dựa vào- cut down = reduce giảm - cut off ngừng cung cấp- die out tuyệt chủng, mất hẳn - drop in ghé qua- be fed up with buồn phiền, chán - fill in điền thông tin- fix up = arrange sắp xếp - get by = manage xoay xở- get down làm thất vọng - get off xuống xe- get on len xe - give out = distribute phân phát- go over = examine xem xét, kiểm tra - hand in nộp- hold on = wait đợi - hold up = stop, delay hoãn, ngừng- leave out = omit bỏ quên, bỏ sót - look back on= remember nhớ lại- look down on coi thường - make out hiểu được- make up bịa đặt - make up for bù, đền bù- pick out chọn ra - pull down phá hủy, phá sập- put forward = suggest đề nghị - put in for đòi hỏi, xin- put out = extinguish tắt đèn, lửa - put up with chịu đựng

76

Page 78: letrungkien.edu.vnletrungkien.edu.vn/uploads/laws/tieng-anh-on-tap-thi... · Web viewPHONETICS NGỮ ÂM * PHẦN I: LÝ THUYẾT. A. PRONUNCIATION. I. NGUYÊN ÂM. 1. Giới thiệu

- run across tình cờ gặp ai - see off tiễn ai- run out of hết - sell off bán giảm giá- send for mời đến, triệu tập - set off / out khởi hành- show around đưa đi tham quan - show off phô trương, khoe khoang- show up = arrive đến - shut up ngừng nói- stand out nổi bật - take on đảm nhận công việc - take over đảm nhiệm, tiếp tục - take up chiếm (thời gian, sức lực)- talk over = discuss thảo luận - think over = consider cân nhắc,nghĩ kỹ- throw away / out ném đi - try on thử quần áo- turn down = refuse từ chối - turn into trở thành,biến thành- wear out mòn, rách - work out = calculate tính toán

agree on sth đồng ý với điều gìagree with đồng ý với aianswer to hợp vớianswer for chịu trách nhiệm vềattend on (upon ) hầu hạattend to chú ýaccount for chiếm, giải thíchallow for tính đến, xem xét đếnask after hỏi thăm sức khỏeask for hỏi xin ai cái gìask sb in/out cho ai vào/raback up ủng hộ, nâng đỡbecome of xảy ra vàobegin with bắt đầu bằngbegin at khởi sự từbelieve in tin cóbelong to thuộc vềbet on đánh cược vàoto be over qua rồibear up= confirm xác nhậnbear out chịu đựngblow out thổi tắtblow down thổi đổblow over thổi quabreak away = run away chạy trốnbreak down hỏng hóc, suy nhược, òa khócbreak in(to+ O) đột nhập, cắt ngangbreak up chia tay, giải tánbreak off tan vỡbring about = result in mang đến, mang lạibring down = to land hạ xuốngbring out xuất bảnbring up nuôi dưỡngbring off thành công, ẵm giải thưởngburn away tắt dần

cut back on / cut down on cắt giảm ( chi tiêu )cut into cắt ngang, chen ngang ( = interrupt )cut ST out off ST cắt cái gì tời khỏi cái gìcut off cô lập, cách li, ngừng phục vụcut up chia nhỏcry for khóc đòicry for ST kêu đóicry with joy khóc vì vuiconsign to giao phó chocount on SB for ST trông cậy vài aicross out gạch đi, xóa đidie away / die down giảm đi, dịu đi ( về cường độ )die out / die off tuyệt chủngdie for thèm cái gì đến chếtdie of chết vìdo away with bãi bỏ, bãi miễndo up sửa lại,trang trí(=decorate)do with làm được gì nhờ códo without làm được gì mà ko cầndraw back rút luidrive at ngụ ý, ám chỉdrop in at SB’s house ghé thăm nhà aidrop off buồn ngủdrop out of school bỏ họcdelight in thích thú vềdepart from bỏ, sửa đổido with chịu đựngdo for a thing kiếm ra một vậtend up kết thúceat up ăn hếteat out ăn ngoài

give away cho đi, tống đi, tiết lộ bí mậtgive ST back trả lạigive in bỏ cuộcgive way to nhượng bộ, đầu hanggive up từ bỏgive out phân biệt, cạn kiệtgive off tỏa ra, phát ra(mùi hương)go out đi ra ngoài, lỗi thờigo out with hẹn hògo through kiểm tra, thực hiện công việcgo through with kiên trì bền bỉgo for cố gắng dành đượcgo in for = take part in tham giago with phù hợpgo without kiêng, nhịngo off đổ chuông, nổi giận, nổ tunggo off with = give away with cuỗm theogo ahead tiến lêngo back on one’s word ko giữ lờigo down with mắc bệnhgo over kiểm tra, xem xét kĩ lưỡnggo up tăng, đi lên, vào đại họcgo into lâm vàogo away cút đi, đi khỏigo round đủ chiago on tiếp tụcgrow out of lớn vượt khỏigrow up lớn lên, trưởng thànhhand down to = pass on to truyền lạihand in giao nộphand back giao lạihand over trao trả quyền lựchand out phân phát (give out )

77

Page 79: letrungkien.edu.vnletrungkien.edu.vn/uploads/laws/tieng-anh-on-tap-thi... · Web viewPHONETICS NGỮ ÂM * PHẦN I: LÝ THUYẾT. A. PRONUNCIATION. I. NGUYÊN ÂM. 1. Giới thiệu

burn out cháy trụicall in/on gọi chocall at ghé thămcall up gọi đi lính, gọi điện thoại, nhắc lại kỉ niệmcall off =put off hủy bỏcall for yêu cầu, mời gọicare about quan tâm, để ý tớicare for muốn, thíchtake care of quan tâm, chăm sóccarry away mang đi , phân phátcarry on = go on Tiếp tụccarry out tiến hành, thực hiệncarry off = bring off catch on trở nên phổ biến, năm bắt kịpcatch up with = keep up with= keep pace with theo kịp ai, cái gìchew over = think over nghĩ kĩcheck in/ out làm thủ tục ra/ vàocheck up kiểm tra sức khỏeclean out dọn sạch, lấy đi hếtclean up dọn gọn gangclear away lấy đi, mang điclear up làm sáng tỏclose down phá sản, đóng cửaclose with tới gầnclose in tiến tớiclose up xích lại gần nhaucome over = visit đến thămcome round hồi tỉnhcome down sụp đổ, giảmcome up xuất hiệncome up with nảy ra, lóe lêncome up against đương đầu, đối mặtcome out with tung ra sản phẩmcome about = happen xảy racome across tình cờ gặpcome apart vỡ vụn, lìa racome along / on with hòa hợp, tiến triểncome into thừa kếcome off thành công, long, bong ra

face up to đương đầu, đối mặtfall back on trông cậy, dựa vàofall in with you mê cái gìfall behind chậm hơn so vs dự định, rớt lại phía saufall through= put off=cancel hủy bỏfall off giảm dầnfall down thất bạifell up to cảm thấy đủ sức làm gìfill in điền vàofill up with Đổ đầyfill out điền hết, điền sạchfill in for đại diện, thay thếfind out tìm raget through to SB liên lạc với aiget through hoàn tất (= accomplish) , vượt qua (=get over)get into đi vào, lên (xe)get in đến, trúng cửget off Cởi bỏ, xuống xe, khởi hànhget out of = avoid tránh, bãi bỏ, hủy bỏget down đi xuống, ghi lạiget SB down làm ai thất vọngget down to doing bắt đầu nghiêm túc làm việc gìget to doing bắt tay vào làm việc gìget round…..(to doing ) xoay xở, hoàn tấtget along/on with = come along/on with hòa hợp, tiến triểnget ST across làm cho cái gì được hiểuget at = drive at ngụ ý, ám chỉget back trở lạiget up ngủ dậyget ahead vượt trước aiget away with cuỗm theo cái gìget over vượt qua aiget along with: hòa hợp get back: (1) return from a place; (2) receive againget out of: rời khỏi

hang round lảng vảnghang on= hold on = hold off cầm máy ( điện thoại )hang up ( off ) cúp máyhang out treo ra ngoàihold off = put off trì hoãnhold on cầm máyhold back kiềm chếhold up cản trở/ trấn lộtjump at a chance/ an opportunity chộp lấy cơ hộijump at a conclusion vội kết luậnjump at an order vội vàng nhận lờijump for joy nhảy lên vì sung sướngjump into ( out of ) nhảy vào ( ra )K keep away from = keep off tránh xakeep out of ngăn cảnkeep SB back from ngăn cản ai ko làm gìkeep SB from = stop SB from keep SB together gắn bókeep up giữ lại, duy trìkeep up with Theo kịp aikeep on cứ tiếp tục làm gìknock down = pull down kéo đổ, sụp đổ, san bằngknock out hạ gục ai look after: take care of look into: investigate look out for: be careful look over: review or check carefully look up: look for information in a reference book make up: (1) invent; (2) do past workmake off: go awayT take up bắt đầu một thói quen mớitake out chuyển cái gì đó ra ngoàitake after giống ai đótake off tháo bỏ, cái gìtake over có được quyền lực

78

Page 80: letrungkien.edu.vnletrungkien.edu.vn/uploads/laws/tieng-anh-on-tap-thi... · Web viewPHONETICS NGỮ ÂM * PHẦN I: LÝ THUYẾT. A. PRONUNCIATION. I. NGUYÊN ÂM. 1. Giới thiệu

Look at / out / for / after / up / up to Look out = watch out = be carefulCome across / up with / down withGo up / on : The number of workers in this company went up considerably last yearGo off : He got up late this morning because his alarm clock didn’t go off . The bomb exploded with a loud bang which could be heard all over the town.(went off )Take after / off :Turn on / off / up / downTurn up : arrive ( He never turns up on time for a meeting )Get on well with = get along with = have good relationship with -Bill seems unhappy in his job because he doesn’t get on well with his bossCalls on = visit (Johnny sometimes visits his grandparents in the countryside. ) Stand for = be short for ( What does "www"stand for?- Is it short for “world wide web?” )See someone off : ( My parents saw me off at the railway station. )Turn off : tắt ( đèn, nứơc, máy móc ) Turn on : mở ,bật ( đèn, nứơc, máy móc )Turn up : xuất hiện Go on : tiếp tục Look after : trông nom ,chăm sóc Look for : tìm kiếm Take off : cởi ra ( quần áo ,giày dép ,nón ... ); cất cách ( máy bay )Fill in : điền vào Try on : thử ( quần áo ,giày dép ... ) Give up : từ bỏ Keep up with : theo kịp Ex: If you don't study hard ,you won't keep up with your classmates : nếu bạn không học tập chăm chỉ ,bạn sẽ không theo kịp các bạn trong lớpRun out of : cạn kiệt ,hết See off : tiển đưa She saw me off at the airport : cô ấy tiển đưa tôi tại sân bay Break down : hư ( xe )Look up : tra ( tự điển )Get off : bước xuống ( xe )Go off : hư ,thiu ( đồ ăn ) ; reng ( chuông )Come off : bung ra ( giày dép ,đồ đạc )Cut off : cắt Bring on : dẫn đến Drop out : xã rác ; bỏ học Drop in : ghé thăm Get over : khỏi bệnh Look over : xem xét Look into : nghiên cứuShut off : tắt Show off : nỗi bật Take after : giống ( ai )She takes after her mother : cô ấy giống mẹ Take in : thămTear up : xé rách Throw up : ói ,nônThink of : tìm ra Put back : để lại chổ củ 

Go on : tiếp tụcGo off : hư ,thiu ( đồ ăn ) ; reng ( chuông )Take off : cởi ra ( quần áo ,giày dép ,nón ... ); cất cách ( máy bay )Take after : giống ( ai )She takes after her mother : cô ấy giống mẹ Take in : thămGet off : bước xuống ( xe )Go off : hư ,thiu ( đồ ăn ) ; reng ( chuông )Get over : khỏi bệnhGet through with : làm xongFill in : điền vàoTry on : thử ( quần áo ,giày dép ... )Give up : từ bỏKeep up with : theo kịp Run out of : cạn kiệt ,hếtSee off : tiển đưa She saw me off at the airport : cô ấy tiển đưa tôi tại sân bayBreak down : hư ( xe )Come off : bung ra ( giày dép ,đồ đạc )

79

Page 81: letrungkien.edu.vnletrungkien.edu.vn/uploads/laws/tieng-anh-on-tap-thi... · Web viewPHONETICS NGỮ ÂM * PHẦN I: LÝ THUYẾT. A. PRONUNCIATION. I. NGUYÊN ÂM. 1. Giới thiệu

Call off : hoãn lại Get through with : làm xongTurn off : tắt ( đèn, nứơc, máy móc ) Turn on : mở ,bật ( đèn, nứơc, máy móc )Turn up : xuất hiệnLook after : trông nom ,chăm sóc Look for : tìm kiếmLook up : tra ( tự điển )Look over : xem xét Look into : nghiên cứu

Cut off : cắtBring on : dẫn đếnDrop out : xã rác ; bỏ học Drop in : ghé thămShut off : tắtShow off : nỗi bậtTear up : xé ráchThrow up : ói ,nônThink of : tìm raPut back : để lại chổ củCall off : hoãn lại

* PHẦN II: BÀI TẬP TRẮC NGHIỆM (60 CÂU)16.Be careful! The tree is going to fall.a. Look out b. Look up c. Look on d. Look afte16.Be careful! The tree is going to fall.a. Look out b. Look up c. Look on d. Look afte16.Be careful! The tree is going to fall.a. Look out b. Look up c. Look on d. Look afte16.Be careful! The tree is going to fall.a. Look out b. Look up c. Look on d. Look afte16.Be careful! The tree is going to fall.a. Look out b. Look up c. Look on d. Look afte16.Be careful! The tree is going to fall.a. Look out b. Look up c. Look on d. Look afte16.Be careful! The tree is going to fall.a. Look out b. Look up c. Look on d. Look afte16.Be careful! The tree is going to fall.a. Look out b. Look up c. Look on d. Look afte16.Be careful! The tree is going to fall.a. Look out b. Look up c. Look on d. Look afte16.Be careful! The tree is going to fall.a. Look out b. Look up c. Look on d. Look afte*Answer keys : 16.Be careful! The tree is going to fall.a. Look out b. Look up c. Look on d. Look afte1. Choose the best answer to complete these following sentences.1. Our car ________ at the side of the highway in the snowstorm.

A. broke into B. broke away C. broke in D. broke down2. The firemen had to break _______ the room to rescue the children.

A. off B. up C. out D. into3. She _______ her father; everyone says how alike they are!A. takes after B. takes off C. falls out D. lets off4. There was a power cut and all the lights _______.A. went up B. put up C. went out D. went ahead5. The doctor asked me to _______ my shirt.A. put off B. take off C. take out D. put out6.Everyone can _______ in this school activity.A. take off B. take on C. take part D. take

80

Page 82: letrungkien.edu.vnletrungkien.edu.vn/uploads/laws/tieng-anh-on-tap-thi... · Web viewPHONETICS NGỮ ÂM * PHẦN I: LÝ THUYẾT. A. PRONUNCIATION. I. NGUYÊN ÂM. 1. Giới thiệu

7. Who will ________ the children while you go out to work?A. look for B. look up C. look after D. look at8. Please ________ the light, it’s getting dark here.A. turn on B. turn off C. turn over D. turn into9. You can __________ the new words in the dictionary.

A. look for B. look after C. look up D. look at10. It’s cold outside. __________ your coat.

A. Put on B. Put down C. Put off D. Put into11. Frank never turns up on time for a meeting.

A. calls B. arrives C. reports D. prepares12. The bomb exploded with a loud bang which could be heard all over the town.

A. went on B. went out C. went off D. went away13. John, could you look after my handbag while I go out for a minute.

A. take part in B. take over C. take place D. take care of14. Bill seems unhappy in his job because he doesn’t get _______ his boss.

A. up to B. on for C. on well with D. in with15. Why do they ______ talking about money all the time?

A. keep on B. give up C. take after D. stop by16. My father gave up smoking two years ago.

A. liked B. continued C. stopped D. enjoyed17. The government hopes to _________ its plans for introducing cable TV.

A. turn out B. carry out C. carry on D. keep on18. I was born in Scotland but I ________ in Northern Ireland.

A. grew up B. raised C. brought up D. rose19. Both Ann and her sister look like her mother.

A. take after B. take place C. take away D. take on20. Why do they………. talking about money all the time?

A. keep on B. side with C. take after D. work off

2. Choose the best answer to complete these following sentences.1. Gertrude takes……….her mother; she has blue eyes and fair hair, too.

A. in B. up C. after D. down 2..Johnny sometimes visits his grandparents in the countryside.A. calls on  B. keeps off C. takes in D. goes up3.They decided to postpone their journey till the end of the month because of the epidemic.A. take up B. turn round C. put off  D. do with4.I do not use those things any more. You can _______ them away.A. get B. fall C. throw  D. make5.They were late for work because their car _______ down.A. got B. put C. cut D. broke6. If you want to join this club, you must__________ this application form.A. make up B. write down C. do up D. fill in7. His son's death was a terrible shock and it took him a long time to__________ it.A. get round B. come through C. go over D. get over8. The bus only stops here to __________ passengers.A. alight B. get on C. get off D. pick up9. While driving to work, we ran out___________ gas.A. up B. of  C. in D. to10. He died ___________ heart disease.A. from B. because C. of  D. in11.Everything is _______ you. I cannot make _______ my mind yet.A. out off / on B. up to / up C. away from / for D. on for / off

81

Page 83: letrungkien.edu.vnletrungkien.edu.vn/uploads/laws/tieng-anh-on-tap-thi... · Web viewPHONETICS NGỮ ÂM * PHẦN I: LÝ THUYẾT. A. PRONUNCIATION. I. NGUYÊN ÂM. 1. Giới thiệu

12.The organization was established in 950 in the USA.A. come around B. set up C. made out D. put on

13.They had to delay their trip because of the bad weather.A. get through B. put off C. keep up with D. go over

14.Johnny sometimes visits his grandparents in the countryside.A. calls on B. keeps off C. takes in D. goes up

15.What does "www" ________ for?- Is it short for “world wide web?”A. sit B. stand C. lie D. point

16. One meter is approximately equal _____ a yard . A. about B. on C. to D. with

17. Jane doesn't spend much money _____ clothes. A. over B. about C. at D. on18. She always takes good care _____ her children. A. for B. in C. of D. with19. Congratulations _____ your success! A. to B. on C. in D. up20. Mrs. Liz was accused _____ having stolen the car. A. of B. with C. in D. upon

3. Choose the best answer to complete these following sentences.1. We are here to provide you _____ the best service possible.

A. of B. with C. to D. for2. He has been absent _____ school very often lately.

A. from B. on C. in D. with3. Vehicles also account _____ air pollution in the cities.

A. on B. at C. for D. in4. The police blamed the mother_____ neglecting her child.

A. to B. for C. with D. of5. They prevented me _____ talking to that woman .

A. from B. on C. with D. at6. They were 30 minutes later because their car _______ down.

A. got B. put C. cut D. broke7. That problem is _______ them. We can’t make _______ our mind yet.

A. out off / on B. up to / up C. away from / for D. on for / off8. Please ________ the light, it’s getting dark here.

A. turn on B. turn off C. turn over D. turn into9.These policies ________ in many elderly and disabled people suffering hardship.

A. recalled B. succeeded C. resulted D. resigned10. “Don’t forget to take _____ your shoes when you are in a Japanese house.”

A. off B. apart C. in D. up 11.The customer had tried ____ some blouses but none of them suited her.

A. at B. with C. in D. on12.Everyone in the village_______ about the plans for the new road.

A. contacted B. took care C. concerned D. was concerned13.I told him I'd prefer to walk, but he insisted _________ giving me a lift

A. about B. on C. to D. for14.Stephen always wanted to be an actor when he _________ up.

A. came B. grew C. brought D. settled15.After his mother died, he was_______ up by his grandmother.

A. grown B. brought C. taken D. drawn16.My uncle took _______ golf when he retired from work.

A. on B. after C. up D. over

82

Page 84: letrungkien.edu.vnletrungkien.edu.vn/uploads/laws/tieng-anh-on-tap-thi... · Web viewPHONETICS NGỮ ÂM * PHẦN I: LÝ THUYẾT. A. PRONUNCIATION. I. NGUYÊN ÂM. 1. Giới thiệu

17.At the station, we often see the sigh “________ for pickpockets”. A. watch on B. watch out C. watch up D. watch at18.I am late because my alarm clock didn’t _________ this morning.

A. come on B. ring out C. go off D. turn on19.UNESCO _____ United Nations Educational, Scientific and Cultural Organization.

A. stands for B. brings about C. takes after D gets across

20.Don't forget to ________ your gloves on. It is cold outside.A let B . make C put D. fix

* PHẦN III: ĐÁP ÁN

1.

1.D 2.D 3.A 4.C 5.B 6.C 7.C 8.A 9.C 10.A

11.B 12.C 13.D 14.C 15.A 16.C 17.B 18.A 19.A 20.A

2.

1.C 2.A 3.C 4.C 5.D 6.D 7.D 8.D 9.B 10.C

11.B 12.B 13.B 14.A 15.B 16.C 17.D 18.C 19.B 20.A

3.

1.B 2.A 3.C 4.B 5.A 6.D 7.B 8.A 9.B 10.A

11.D 12.C 13.B 14.B 15.B 16.C 17.B 18.C 19.A 20.C

CHUYÊN ĐỀ 12 (CÔ DUYÊN)

SOME IMPORTANT GRAMMATICAL POINTS(MỘT SỐ ĐIỂM NGƯ PHÁP QUAN TRỌNG)

* PHẦN I: LÝ THUYẾT

1. CLAUSES AND PHRASES OF PURPOSE(MEÄNH ÑEÀ VAØ CUÏM TÖØ CHÆ MUÏC ÑÍCH)

Clause of purpose laø meänh ñeà phuï duøng ñeå chæ muïc ñích do haønh ñoäng cuûa meänh ñeà chính gaây ra.a. Hieän taïi :

S + V ( present ) + so that / in order that + S + ( shall / will / can / may ) + ( not ) + V

Ex1 : The laser beam seals blood vessels so that / in order that the mark becomes less conspicuous.Ex2 : I try to study so that / in order that I won’t ( can’t ) fail the exam.b. Quaù khöù :

S + V ( past ) + so that / in order that + S + ( would / should / could / might ) + ( not ) + V

Ex1 : I hurried so that / in order that I wouldn’t be late.Ex2 : She tried to study so that / in order that she wouldn’t ( couldn’t ) fail the exam.

83

Page 85: letrungkien.edu.vnletrungkien.edu.vn/uploads/laws/tieng-anh-on-tap-thi... · Web viewPHONETICS NGỮ ÂM * PHẦN I: LÝ THUYẾT. A. PRONUNCIATION. I. NGUYÊN ÂM. 1. Giới thiệu

Ex3 : She tried to study so that / in order that she would ( could ) pass the exam.c. Chuù yù : Chuû ngöõ trong meänh ñeà chính vaø meänh ñeà phuï coù theå gioáng nhau hoaëc khaùc nhau tuyø theo yù nghóa cuûa töøng caâu.

Phrase of purpose laø cuïm ñoäng töø nguyeân maãu duøng ñeå chæ muïc ñích do haønh ñoäng cuûa meänh ñeà chính gaây ra.a. Hieän taïi : * Khaúng ñònh :

S + V ( present ) + ( for + s.o / sth ) to / in order to + V

84

Page 86: letrungkien.edu.vnletrungkien.edu.vn/uploads/laws/tieng-anh-on-tap-thi... · Web viewPHONETICS NGỮ ÂM * PHẦN I: LÝ THUYẾT. A. PRONUNCIATION. I. NGUYÊN ÂM. 1. Giới thiệu

Ex2 : You should walk slowly for your sister to follow.* Phuû ñònh :

S + V ( present ) + ( for + s.o / sth ) so as not to / not to + V

Ex1: I try to study so as not to / not to fail the exam.Ex2 : Linda takes off her shoes so as not to / not to make any noise. b. Quaù khöù :* Khaúng ñònh :

S + V ( past ) + ( for s.o / sth ) to / in order to + VEx1 : The man spoke loudly for everyone to hear him clearly.Ex2 : She tried to study in order to / to pass the exam.* Phuû ñònh :

S + V ( past ) + ( for s.o / sth ) so as not to / not to + V

Ex1: Mary hid the novel under her pillow for her father not to see it.Ex2 : She tried to study so as not to fail the exam.c. Chuù y ù : Khi keát hôïp caâu trong tröôøng hôïp naøy , neáu:- Hai chuû ngöõ trong hai meänh ñeà truøng nhau, chuû ngöõ trong meänh ñeà sau ñöôïc löôït boû.- Hai chuû ngöõ trong hai meänh ñeà khaùc nhau , chuû ngöõ trong meänh ñeà sau ñöôïc bieán ñoåi tröïc tieáp thaønh taân ngöõ cho giôùi töø for.

***

2. CLAUSES AND PHRASES OF REASON( MEÄNH ÑEÀ VAØ CUÏM TÖØ CHÆ LYÙ DO )

Clause of reason laø meänh ñeà phuï duøng ñeå chæ lyù do hoaëc nguyeân nhaân cuûa haønh ñoäng maø meänh ñeà chính gaây ra. Noù ñöôïc noái vôùi meänh ñeà chính nhôø caùc lieân töø: Because, Since, As.

Because S + V + ( O ) , S + V + ( O ) S + V + ( O ) because S + V + ( O )

Ex1: Because Mary was ill, she didn’t go to school yesterday. = Mary didn’t go to school yesterday because she was ill.Ex2 : Because Mary’s mother was ill, she didn’t go to school yesterday. = Mary didn’t go to school yesterday because her mother was ill.* Chuù yù : Chuû ngöõ trong meänh ñeà chính vaø chuû ngöõ trong meâïnh ñeà phuï coù theå gioáng nhau hoaëc khaùc nhau.

Phrase of reason laø cuïm töø chæ lyù do hoaëc nguyeân nhaân cuûa haønh ñoäng maø meänh ñeà chính gaây ra.

Because of V-ing / ( Pro ) / N / NP , S + V + ( O ) S + V + ( O ) because of V-ing / ( Pro ) / N / NP

Ex1: Because of illness, Mary didn’t go to school yesterday. = Mary didn’t go to school yesterday because of illness.Ex2: He passed the exam because of working hard. = Because of working hard, he passed the exam.Ex3: Because of her mother’s illness, Mary didn’t go to school yesterday. = Mary didn’t go to school yesterday because of her mother’s illness.* Chuù yù : 1. Neáu chuû ngöõ trong meänh ñeà chính vaø chuû ngöõ trong meâïnh ñeà phuï gioáng nhau, coù theå löôït boû chuû ngöõ trong meänh ñeà phuï, ñöa ñoäng töø veà nguyeân maãu tröôùc khi theâm ing hoaëc bieán ñoåi meänh ñeà phuï thaønh cuïm danh töø nhö trong ví duï 1 vaø 2. 2. Neáu chuû ngöõ trong meänh ñeà chính vaø chuû ngöõ trong meâïnh ñeà phuï khaùc nhau, khoâng theå löôït boû chuû ngöõ trong meänh ñeà phuï maø phaûi bieán ñoåi meänh ñeà phuï thaønh cuïm danh töø nhö trong ví duï 3.

***

85

Page 87: letrungkien.edu.vnletrungkien.edu.vn/uploads/laws/tieng-anh-on-tap-thi... · Web viewPHONETICS NGỮ ÂM * PHẦN I: LÝ THUYẾT. A. PRONUNCIATION. I. NGUYÊN ÂM. 1. Giới thiệu

3. CLAUSES AND PHRASES OF CONCESSION( MEÄNH ÑEÀ VAØ CUÏM TÖØ CHÆ SÖÏ TÖÔNG PHAÛN )

Clause of concession laø meänh ñeà phuï duøng ñeå chæ söï töông phaûn cuûa haønh ñoäng maø meänh ñeà chính gaây ra. Noù ñöôïc noái vôùi meänh ñeà chính nhôø caùc lieân töø: Though, Although vaø Even though .

Ex1: Though he had a good salary, he was unhappy in his job. = He was unhappy in his job though he had a good salary. Ex2: Even though the weather was cold, I went swimming. = I went swimming even though the weather was cold.* Chuù yù : Chuû ngöõ trong meänh ñeà chính vaø chuû ngöõ trong meâïnh ñeà phuï coù theå gioáng nhau hoaëc khaùc nhau.

Phrase of concession laø cuïm töø chæ söï töông phaûn cuûa haønh ñoäng maø meänh ñeà chính gaây ra.

Despite/ In spite of V-ing / ( Pro ) / N / NP , S + V + ( O )

S + V + ( O ) despite/in spite of V-ing / ( Pro )/ N / NP

Ex1: In spite of (having) a good salary, he was unhappy in his job.= He was unhappy in his job in spite of (having) a good salary.Ex2: Despite the cold weather, I went swimming. = I went swimming despite the cold weather.* Chuù yù : 1. Neáu chuû ngöõ trong meänh ñeà chính vaø chuû ngöõ trong meâïnh ñeà phuï gioáng nhau, coù theå löôït boû chuû ngöõ trong meänh ñeà phuï, ñöa ñoäng töø veà nguyeân maãu tröôùc khi theâm -ing hoaëc bieán ñoåi meänh ñeà phuï thaønh cuïm danh töø nhö trong ví duï 1. 2. Neáu chuû ngöõ trong meänh ñeà chính vaø chuû ngöõ trong meâïnh ñeà phuï khaùc nhau, khoâng theå löôït boû chuû ngöõ trong meänh ñeà phuï maø phaûi bieán ñoåi meänh ñeà phuï thaønh cuïm danh töø nhö trong ví duï 2.

***

4. CLAUSES OF RESULT (MEÄNH ÑEÀ CHÆ KEÁT QUAÛ)

Clause of result laø meänh ñeà phuï duøng ñeå chæ keát quaû cuûa haønh ñoäng maø meänh ñeà chính gaây ra. Noù ñöôïc noái vôùi meänh ñeà chính nhôø caùc töø nhö: so …… that …….. ; such ……. that ……….* So ……....that a. Hieän taïi :

S + V ( present ) + so + adj / adv + that + S + ( shall / will / can / may ) + ( not ) + V

Ex1 : My friend is so strong that he can lift up the table by himself.Ex2 : The cost of education is rising so rapidly that students are looking for ways to cut expenses.b. Quaù khöù :

S + V ( past ) + so + adj / adv + that + S + ( would / should / could / might ) + ( not ) + V

Ex1 : My friend was so strong that he could lift up the table by himself.Ex2 : The cost of education was rising so rapidly that students were looking for ways to cut expenses.

86

Though/ Although/ Even though S + V + ( O ) , S + V + ( O ) S + V + ( O ) though/ although/ even though S + V + ( O )

Page 88: letrungkien.edu.vnletrungkien.edu.vn/uploads/laws/tieng-anh-on-tap-thi... · Web viewPHONETICS NGỮ ÂM * PHẦN I: LÝ THUYẾT. A. PRONUNCIATION. I. NGUYÊN ÂM. 1. Giới thiệu

Ex3 : She studied so hard that she would ( could ) pass the exam.* such ………….. thata. Hieän taïi :

S + V ( present ) + such + ( a/an) + adj + noun + that + S + ( shall / will / can / may ) + ( not ) + V

Ex1 : Mary has such a beautiful voice that we all like to hear her sing.Ex2 : This is such an ugly chair that I am going to give it away.b. Quaù khö ù :

S + V ( past ) + such + ( a/an ) + adj + noun + that + S + ( would / should / could / might ) + ( not ) + V

Ex1 : It was such a nice day that we wanted to go out for a walk.Ex2 : He gave me such good advice that I could pass the exam easily. c. Chuù yù : Chuû ngöõ trong meänh ñeà chính vaø meänh ñeà phuï coù theå gioáng nhau hoaëc khaùc nhau tuyø theo yù nghóa cuûa töøng caâu.* enough ……… to

S + V + adj / adv + enough + ( for + someone/something ) + to-V

Ex1: My brother is old enough to go to school.Ex2: She works hard enough to pass the coming exam.Ex3: The exercises were easy enough for you to do in 15 minutes.Ex4: They spoke English slowly enough for us to understand.* too ………….. to

S + V + too + adj / adv + ( for + someone/something ) + to-V

Ex1: He is too young to go to school.Ex2: He spoke too fast to understand.Ex3: The questions are too difficult for us to answer.Ex4: They spoke English too slowly for us to understand.

***

5. SEQUENCE OF TENSES IN ADVERBIAL CLAUSES OF TIME

(SÖÏ PHOÁI HÔÏP CAÙC THÌ TRONG MEÄNH ÑEÀ TRAÏNG NGÖÕ CHÆ THÔØI GIAN)

a. Compare : (haõy so saùnh)(a) He walked up and down until he was ressured by the returning

warmth. an adverbial clause (Meänh ñeà traïng ngöõ chæ

thôøi gian ) Anh aáy daäm chaân leân xuoáng cho ñeán khi anh ta yeân taâm ñaõ laáy

laïi ñöôïc hôi aám.(b) I will wait until you come back .

Toâi seõ ñôïi cho ñeán khi baïn quay trôû laïi.Notes : Trong caâu (a) caû hai ñoäng töø “walked “ vaø “was ressured “ ôû thì quaù khöù ñôn. Trong caâu (b) ñoäng töø trong meänh ñeà chính “will wait “ ôû thì töông lai ñôn vaø ñoäng töø trong meänh ñeà traïng ngöõ chæ thôøi gian “ come back “ ôû thì hieän taïi ñôn.b. Observe the following sequence of tenses. (Haõy quan saùt söï phoái hôïp thì sau)+ Sequence with the simple present in the main clause denoting a customary activity(Phoái hôïp vôùi thì hieän taïi ñôn ôû meänh ñeà chính chæ hoaït ñoäng theo thoùi quen bình thöôøng)

87

Page 89: letrungkien.edu.vnletrungkien.edu.vn/uploads/laws/tieng-anh-on-tap-thi... · Web viewPHONETICS NGỮ ÂM * PHẦN I: LÝ THUYẾT. A. PRONUNCIATION. I. NGUYÊN ÂM. 1. Giới thiệu

We always take our umbrellas with us when it rains.Chuùng toâi luoân mang duø ñi cuøng chuùng toâi khi naøo trôøi möa.

Customary activityHaønh ñoäng theo thoùi quen bình thöôøng

I usually read the newspaper while I am waiting for the bus.Toâi thöôøng ñoïc baùo trong khi toâi ñang ñôïi xe buyùt.

Emphasizing the continuous nature of the activityNhaán maïnh baûn chaát tieáp dieãn cuûa haønh ñoäng.

He never goes home before he has finished his work .Anh aáy khoâng bao giôø veà nhaø tröôùc khi anh ta hoaøn taát coâng vieäc.

Emphasizing the completion of the activityNhaán maïnh ñeán söï hoaøn taát cuûa haønh ñoäng

+ Sequence with the future tenses in the main clause(Phoái hôïp vôùi caùc thì ôû töông lai trong meänh ñeà chính)I am going to wait until you have finished your work.Toâi coù yù ñònh ñôïi cho tôùi khi naøo baïn hoaøn taát coâng vieäc.We will go as soon as you have finished your work.Toâi seõ ñi khi naøo baïn hoaøn taát coâng vieäc.We will go when you finish your work.Toâi seõ ñi khi baïn hoaøn thaønh coâng vieäc.

The present perfect emphasizes the completion of the activity

Thì hieän taïi hoaøn thaønh nhaán maïnh ñeán söï hoaøn taát cuûa haønh ñoäng

We’ll have already finished the work when you get back.

Chuùng toâi seõ saün saøng hoaøn taát coâng vieäc khi naøo baïn quay trôû laïi.

Will have finished in the main clause expresses the completion of an activity at a point of time in the future. Will have finished trong meänh ñeà chính dieãn taû söï hoaøn taát cuûa haønh ñoäng taïi moät thôøi ñieåm xaùc ñònh trong töông lai.

+ Sequence with the past tenses in the main clause(Phoái hôïp vôùi caùc thì ôû quaù khöù trong meänh ñeà chính)1. I sat near the window whenever I took a bus.Toâi ngoài gaàn cöûa soå baát cöù khi naøo toâi ñi xe buyùt.2. It was raining hard when I got there.Trôøi ñang möa naëng haït khi toâi ñeán ñoù.

3. I met him while I was walking down the street.Toâi gaëp anh ta trong khi toâi ñi boä xuoáng ñöôøng.

4. I was watching T.V. while my father was reading.Toâi ñang xem T.V trong khi ñoù boá toâi ñang ñoïc saùch.

+ Customary activity in the pastHaønh ñoäng theo thoùi quen bình thöôøng trong quaù khöù.

+ The simple past in 2,3,8 denotes wholly completed activities at a point of time in the past.Thì quaù khöù ñôn trong caâu 2,3,8 chæ ñeán caùc hoaït ñoäng hoaøn toaøn keát thuùc taïi moät thôøi ñieåm xaùc ñònh trong quaù khöù.+ The past continuous in 2,3,4 denotes continuous activities at a point of time or an implied point of time in the past.Thì quaù khöù tieáp dieãn trong caâu 2,3,4 chæ ñeán caùc haønh ñoäng tieáp dieãn taïi moät thôøi ñieåm hoaëc moät ñieåm thôøi gian haøm yù trong

88

Page 90: letrungkien.edu.vnletrungkien.edu.vn/uploads/laws/tieng-anh-on-tap-thi... · Web viewPHONETICS NGỮ ÂM * PHẦN I: LÝ THUYẾT. A. PRONUNCIATION. I. NGUYÊN ÂM. 1. Giới thiệu

5. He left after / when / as soon as / he had finished his work.Anh ta rôøi sau khi / khi / ngay khi anh ta ñaõ hoaøn thaønh coâng vieäc.6. The train had already left when I arrived at the station.Chuyeán taøu ñaõ rôøi roài khi toâi ñeán saân ga.7. I have felt much better since I have been there. Toâi ñaõ caûm thaáy toát hôn töø khi toâi ôû taïi ñaây.

8. She has played the piano since she was a child. Coâ ta ñaõ chôi döông caàm töø khi coøn nhoû.

quaù khöù.+ The past perfect in 5,6 expresses activities that occurred before other activities in the past.Thì quaù khöù hoaøn thaønh trong caâu 5,6 dieãn taû caùc haønh ñoâng xaûy ra tröôùc caùc haønh ñoäng khaùc trong qua khöù.

+ The present perfect in 7,8 expresses activities that began in the past and has continued to the present, and may continue to the future.Thì hieän tai hoaøn thaønh trong caâu 7,8 dieãn taû caùc haønh ñoäng baét ñaàu xaûy ra trong quaù khöù vaãn coøn tieáp dieãn ñeán hieän taïi vaø coù theå tieáp tuïc dieãn ra trong töông lai.

* Notes :a. There are no future tenses in the adverbial clauses of time. (Khoâng duøng baát cöù thì töông lai naøo trong meänh ñeà traïng ngöõ chæ thôøi gian.)b. The adverbial clauses of time are introduced by the following conjunctions: when, whenever, before, after, since, as, as soon as, while, until, just as, no sooner … than, hardly … when, as long as, etc. (Meänh ñeà traïng ngöõ chæ thôøi gian thöôøng ñöôïc baét ñaàu baèng nhöõng lieân töø chæ thôøi gian: when (khi) , whenever ( baát cöù khi naøo) , before ( tröôùc khi) , after (sau khi) , since ( töø khi) , as (khi, ngay khi, trong khi) , as soon as ( ngay khi) , while ( trong khi) until ( cho ñeán khi), till (cho ñeán khi ) , just as (ngay khi) , no sooner ... than (lieàn ngay), hardly … when ( vöøa khi), as long as ( ngay khi) , vv.)

* PHẦN II: BÀI TẬP TRẮC NGHIỆM (50 CÂU)

I. Choose the best answer A, B, C, or D to complete each sentence.1. You should say goodbye to your brother…………… you leave for Europe. A. despite B. after C. since D. before2. …………… he is old, he wants to travel around the world.A. In spite of B. Although C. Despite D. Because3. …………… I came to this country, I couldn't speak a word of English. A. Since B. After C. When D. Before4. The film was……………..boring that we had left before the end.A. such B. too C. so D. enough5. They left the house .............. saying good-bye to their mother.A. before B. after C. during D. in6. The class discussion was short. …......., we gained some new knowledge from it.A. However B. Moreover C. Although D. Therefore7. ................ you study harder, you will not win a scholarship.A. Unless B. Because C. If D. In order that8. …………….. the dance, Jerry said good-bye to his girlfriend. A. Before left B. Before he leaves C. Before leaving D. Before he will leave9. The country air is fresh. .................., it is not polluted. A. However B. Moreover C. Whenever D. So10. It was_________that we went for a walk.A. such beautiful weather B. so as beautiful night C. no nice weather D. such a nice weather11. He never goes to bed .................... he finishes his homework.

89

Page 91: letrungkien.edu.vnletrungkien.edu.vn/uploads/laws/tieng-anh-on-tap-thi... · Web viewPHONETICS NGỮ ÂM * PHẦN I: LÝ THUYẾT. A. PRONUNCIATION. I. NGUYÊN ÂM. 1. Giới thiệu

A. unless B. when C. while D. if12. My mother is washing the dishes _________ my father is watching television. A. when B. while C. as D. since 13. He's still going to school ………........ his injury.A. even though B. although C. in spite of D. even14. He left home early .................. he could arrive at the station on time.A. because of B. in order to C. although D. so that15. We will wait here ................ he comes back.A. while B. until C. before D. after16. Thousands of people came to see the Queen ................ the rain.A. because B. owing to C. in spite of D. according to17. We could reach the house .................. the road was flooded.A. although B. whether C. as if D. even18. Our teacher speaks slowly ................... we may understand him.A. because B. in order to C. so that D. or19. I haven't seen Tom ............... he gave me this book.A. since B. for C. until D. before20. Faraday’s father was ……………poor to send him to school.A. so B. too C. much D. very21. ............ it is getting dark, she still waits for him.A. Unless B. Since C. While D. Although22. ....................... he has a headache, he has to take an aspirin.A. How B. Because C. Where D. Although23. …………….. the firemen arrived to help, we had already put out the fire. A. Until B. No sooner C. By the time D. After24. Our visit to Japan was delayed ............... my wife's illness.A. because B. because of C. thanks to D. though25. Trees won't grow .................. there is enough water.A. if B. when C. unless D. as26. It was …………. that we went for a picnic in the countryside.A. so a nice day B. such nice day C. so nice day D. such a nice day27. ................ she's busy, she still helps you.A. Although B. Because C. Since D. As28. Take a map with you ............... you lose your way.A. in case B. so C. because D. although29. I couldn't unlock it ................ I had the wrong key.A. because B. so that C. since D. so30. He agreed to go climbing .............. he hated heights.A. although B. in case C. since D. because31. He got a new alarm clock .................... he'd get up on time.A. although B. so that C. since D. so32. He hasn't written to us ................. he left.A. as long as B. since C. by the time D. as soon as33. She'll only do the job .............. you pay her more.A. before B. after C. if D. while34. The gate was shut ....................... the cows won't get out of the cage.A. so as to B. in order to C. so as not D. so that35. …………… Peter gets here, we will congratulate him. A. As soon as B. After C. No sooner D. Since36. We moved to the front row ................ we could hear and see better.A. so B. so that C. such D. such that37. I made a mistake …………… I was tired.A. though B. so that C. because D. if38. …………… a headache, he enjoyed the film.A. Although B. In spite of C. Because of D. However39. …………… my homework, I went to bed.

90

Page 92: letrungkien.edu.vnletrungkien.edu.vn/uploads/laws/tieng-anh-on-tap-thi... · Web viewPHONETICS NGỮ ÂM * PHẦN I: LÝ THUYẾT. A. PRONUNCIATION. I. NGUYÊN ÂM. 1. Giới thiệu

A. After I had finished B. After finished C. Finished D. After had finished40. Minh had a terrible headache. .............., he went to school.A. Therefore B. But C. However D. AlthoughII. Choose one sentence that best rewrites the sentence given.41. We stayed in that hotel despite the noiseA. Despite the hotel is noisy, we stayed there. B. We stayed in the noisy hotel and we liked it.C. Although the hotel was noisy, we stayed there. D. Because of the noise, we stayed in the hotel.42. They can’t work and travel because they are old.A. Because of their old age, they can’t work and travel. B. In spite of their old age, they can work and travel.C. Despite their old age, they still work and travel. D. Even though they work and travel, they are old.43. Despite the bad weather, people travel by airA. Even though the weather is bad, people travel by air. B. Because the weather is bad, people travel by air.C. In spite of people travel by air, the weather is bad. D. Although the bad weather, people travel by air.44. She is learning English because she wants to get a better job.A. She is learning English so that she get a better job. B. She is learning English so as she gets a better job.C. She is learning English in order she can get a better job. D. She is learning English so that she will be able to get a better job.45. He was very tired but he kept on working.A. Despite he was very tired, he kept on working. B. In spite of he was very tired, he kept on working.C. Though his tiredness, he kept on working. D. Although he was very tired, he kept on working.46. The fog was so thick that our flight was cancelled.A. The fog was quite thick, but the plane still took off. B. Despite the fog, the plane took off.C. Our flight was cancelled because the fog was quite thick. D. We had a nice flight in such thick fog.47. She was so busy that she couldn’t answer the phone.A. Because she was very busy, she couldn’t answer the phone. B. Because she was very busy, she could answer the phone.C. Although she was very busy, she couldn’t answer the phone.D. Although she was very busy, she could answer the phone.48. Despite feeling cold, we kept walking.A. Although we felt cold, but we kept walking B. Although we felt cold, we kept walkingC. However cold we felt, but we kept walking D. However we felt cold, we kept walking49. The children laughed a lot because of the funny story.A. The children laughed because the story is funny. B. The children laughed because of the story funny.C. The children laughed because it was funny. D. The children laughed because the story was funny.50. Although she tells lies, I believe her.A. In spite of telling lies, I believe her. B. In spite her telling lies, I believe her. C. In spite of her telling lies, I believe her. D. In spite of her tell lies, I believe her.

* PHẦN III: ĐÁP ÁN

1D 2B 3C 4C 5B 6A 7A 8C 9B 10A

11A 12B 13C 14D 15B 16C 17A 18C 19A 20B

21D 22B 23C 24B 25C 26D 27A 28A 29A 30A

91

Page 93: letrungkien.edu.vnletrungkien.edu.vn/uploads/laws/tieng-anh-on-tap-thi... · Web viewPHONETICS NGỮ ÂM * PHẦN I: LÝ THUYẾT. A. PRONUNCIATION. I. NGUYÊN ÂM. 1. Giới thiệu

31B 32B 33C 34D 35A 36B 37C 38B 39A 40C

41C 42A 43A 44D 45D 46C 47A 48B 49D 50C

CHUYÊN ĐỀ 14 (THẦY CẢNH)

ĐỀ THI CÓ 5 ĐỀ THI DÀNH CHO CÁC EM Ở CÁC TRANG DƯỚI

ĐỀ 1:BỘ GIÁO DỤC VÀ ĐÀO TẠO KỲ THI TRUNG HỌC PHÔ THÔNG QUỐC GIA NĂM 2019

Bài thi: NGOẠI NGƯ; Môn thi: TIẾNG ANHĐỀ THI THAM KHẢO(Đề thi có 05 trang) Thời gian làm bài: 60 phút, không kể thời gian phát đề

Họ, tên thí sinh: .....................................................................

92

Page 94: letrungkien.edu.vnletrungkien.edu.vn/uploads/laws/tieng-anh-on-tap-thi... · Web viewPHONETICS NGỮ ÂM * PHẦN I: LÝ THUYẾT. A. PRONUNCIATION. I. NGUYÊN ÂM. 1. Giới thiệu

Mã đề thi 001Số báo danh: ..........................................................................Mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the word whose underlined part differs from the other three in pronunciation in each of the following questions.Question 1: A. washed B. formed C. turned D. boiledQuestion 2: A. house B. mouth C. could D. found

Mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the word that differs from the other three in the position of primary stress in each of the following questions.Question 3: A. inform B. explore C. preventQuestion 4: A. attitude B. manager C. invention

D. cancelD. company

Mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the correct answer to each of thefollowing questions.Question 5: My parents hope to travel around ______ world next summer.

A. a B. an C. the D. Ø (no article)Question 6: If you watch this film, you ______ about the cultures of Southeast Asian countries.

A. learned B. were learning C. will learn D. would learnQuestion 7: Paul noticed a job advertisement while he ______ along the street.

A. was walking B. would walk C. walked D. had walkedQuestion 8: Solar energy is not widely used ______ it is friendly to the environment.

A. since B. although C. in spite of D. because ofQuestion 9: The sign warns people ______ the dangers of swimming in this river.

A. about B. from C. with D. toQuestion 10: ______, they were surprised to find their favourite band playing there.

A. On arrival at the party B. To have attended the partyC. They had arrived at the party D. Just attended the party

Question 11: Once ______ in large quantities, these products will be more affordably priced.A. are produced B. having produced C. produced D. producing Question 12: Jane

would never forget ______ first prize in such a prestigious competition.A. to be awarded B. being awarded C. to have awarded D. having awarded

Question 13: You should turn off the lights before going out to save ______.A. electricity B. electrify C. electric D. electrically

Question 14: ______ school fees may discourage many students from attending university.A. Gaining B. Receiving C. Improving D. Raising

Question 15: Drinking too much alcohol is said to ______ harm to our health.A. make B. do C. lead D. take

Question 16: At the end of the training course, each participant was presented with a ______ ofcompletion.

A. degree B. certificate C. diploma D. qualificationQuestion 17: The ______ high levels of pollution in the coastal areas are a matter of greatconcern to the government.

A. redundantly B. intensively C. marginally D. excessivelyQuestion 18: Event organisers should plan everything carefully so as to leave nothing to ______.

A. possibility B. mistake C. opportunity D. chance

Trang 1/5 – Mã đề thi 001

93

Page 95: letrungkien.edu.vnletrungkien.edu.vn/uploads/laws/tieng-anh-on-tap-thi... · Web viewPHONETICS NGỮ ÂM * PHẦN I: LÝ THUYẾT. A. PRONUNCIATION. I. NGUYÊN ÂM. 1. Giới thiệu

Mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the word(s) CLOSEST in meaning to the underlined word(s) in each of the following questions.Question 19: The discovery of the new planet was regarded as a major breakthrough inastronomy.

A. promised B. doubted C. considered D. refusedQuestion 20: Mary has finally managed to get round her strict parents to let her go on a three-day excursion with her classmates.

A. permit B. persuade C. offer D. support

Mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the word(s) OPPOSITE in meaning to the underlined word(s) in each of the following questions.Question 21: Traffic congestion in big cities deters many people from using their private cars at peak hours.

A. prohibits B. protects C. encourages D. limitsQuestion 22: These days, many people only read printed newspapers once in a while as they tend to access information online.

A. regularly B. attentively C. occasionally D. selectively

Mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the option that best completes each of the following exchanges.Question 23: Jack is inviting Mary to his party.Jack: ''Would you like to come to my party this weekend?''Mary: ''______.''

A. Yes, I'd love to B. No, don't worry C. You're welcome D. I'm afraid so Question 24: Laura and Mitchell are talking about their school curriculum.- Laura: ''I think Art should be a compulsory subject.''- Mitchell: ''______. Art helps develop creativity.''

A. I quite agree B. You must be kiddingC. I'm of the opposite opinion D. I don't think that's a good idea

Read the following passage and mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the correct word or phrase that best fits each of the numbered blanks from 25 to 29.

Advances in mobile technology and social networking websites mean we spend more time online than ever before. If Facebook were a country, it would be the third largest in the world by population (The Economist, 2010). It is (25) ______ not surprising that so many psychologists,sociologists, and others are eager to give their thoughts on how this is impacting negatively on our society.

The biggest criticism levelled at social networking is that young people are losing their offline friends to online friends (26) ______ are unable to provide the same deep connection andemotional support. However, a lot of research shows these criticisms are generally (27) ______.Allen et al. (2010) discovered that it is socially adjusted adolescents who are more likely to have a networking profile than those who are not. One study by the Pew Internet and American Life Project (2009) found that people are not (28) ______ offline friends with online companions butare using them to support their offline relationships. The study also found that social networks allow us to have discussions with a much more diverse set of people than in the real world, so we share knowledge with people from a wide (29) ______ of backgrounds.

(Adapted from ''Skillful Reading & Writing 4''by Mike Boyle and Lindsay Warwick)

Question 25: A. while B. however C. despite D. thereforeQuestion 26: A. what B. who C. which D. whomQuestion 27: A. uninvolved B. unequalled C. unsettled D. unfoundedQuestion 28: A. making B. providing C. combining D. substitutingQuestion 29: A. vary B. variety C. various D. variously

Trang 2/5 – Mã đề thi 001

Page 96: letrungkien.edu.vnletrungkien.edu.vn/uploads/laws/tieng-anh-on-tap-thi... · Web viewPHONETICS NGỮ ÂM * PHẦN I: LÝ THUYẾT. A. PRONUNCIATION. I. NGUYÊN ÂM. 1. Giới thiệu

Read the following passage and mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the correct answer to each of the questions from 30 to 34.

Visitors to London are struck by the proud splendour and glamour of one of the world's oldest capitals, admiring iconic sites like Big Ben, the Palace of Westminster and Buckingham Palace. However, visitors seeking a glimpse into the city's everyday life should not miss Portobello Market, which is the most-visited market in London.

This vibrant market has been featured in a number of films, documentaries and best-selling books, the most famous being the film ''Notting Hill'' starring Hugh Grant and Julia Roberts, which brought Portobello Market to the attention of audiences all over the world.

Portobello Market is divided into different sections selling second-hand items, clothing, jewellery, souvenirs and vegetables. The most sought-after area is devoted to antiques. Visitors may feel overwhelmed as there are over 1,000 booths manned by antique dealers from throughout England. It's a great fun to browse through antique cameras, watches, pottery and paintings that date back 300 years. They are sold at different prices, so it's possible to find a few good bargains. It seems that both buyers and sellers look forward to the weekends when they can meet and escape the city's fast pace at Portobello Market.

When tired from exploring the market, visitors can drop into the nearby food courts to savour an Indian curry, Italian pizza or sandwiches from Europe. It's a great pleasure to drink a cappuccino while listening to street performers. These represent the lively fun of Portobello Market, offering exciting experiences that keep people coming back.

(Adapted from ''Heritage'' - Vietnam Airlines in-flight magazine)Question 30: What is the passage mainly about?

A. The film ''Notting Hill'' B. The city of LondonC. Portobello Market D. European cuisine

Question 31: According to the passage, Portobello Market has been featured in all of thefollowing EXCEPT ______.

A. films B. documentaries C. books D. songsQuestion 32: The word ''they'' in paragraph 3 refers to ______.

A. prices B. bargains C. buyers and sellers D. weekendsQuestion 33: Visitors to the antique area may feel overwhelmed because ______.

A. they can meet all sorts of people from EnglandB. all the antiques are sold at the same priceC. there are a large number of antique shops thereD. all the antiques are more than 300 years old

Question 34: The word ''savour'' in paragraph 4 mostly means ______.A. see B. prepare C. enjoy D. make

Read the following passage and mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the correct answer to each of the questions from 35 to 42.

Cambridge University is considering axing compulsory written exams, allowing students to use laptops or iPads instead, after tutors complained that students' handwriting is becoming illegible. Academics say the move, which would bring an end to over 800 years of tradition, has come about because students rely too heavily on laptops in lectures, and are losing the ability to write by hand.

Dr Sarah Pearsall, a senior lecturer at Cambridge University, said handwriting is becoming a ''lost art'' among the current generation of students. She added, ''It's increasingly hard for our examiners to read students' scripts. Those with illegible writing are forced to come back to their college during the summer holidays to read their answers aloud in the presence of two university administrators. It's extraordinarily commendable that the University is considering reforms to its examination practices.''

Sir Anthony Seldon, Vice-Chancellor of the University of Buckingham, said it is inevitable that universities will move to computers as handwriting deteriorates in the coming

Trang 3/5 – Mã đề thi 001

Page 97: letrungkien.edu.vnletrungkien.edu.vn/uploads/laws/tieng-anh-on-tap-thi... · Web viewPHONETICS NGỮ ÂM * PHẦN I: LÝ THUYẾT. A. PRONUNCIATION. I. NGUYÊN ÂM. 1. Giới thiệu

years. ''We have to accept the reality. Handwriting has now become an optional, not a necessary, part of education. There simply isn't the same time in the curriculum for learning elegant, beautiful handwriting. Life is so quick now. Everybody writes as if they were a doctor writing a prescription,'' he said. ''Handwriting is not necessary for great thought, great English, or great intelligence. Some of our finest wordsmiths today write using laptops, and we have to fight to preserve what is really important, such as the use of great English or great sentence structures.''

Others, however, were not very positive about the move. Tracey Trussell, a handwriting expert, urged Cambridge to ensure that students continue to write by hand. She said, ''It's vital that people continue to write by hand. Writing by hand improves memory and equates to a higher rate of comprehension and information retention.'' There is also concern that schools could follow Cambridge's example by moving away from handwriting. Dr Jane Medwell, Associate Professor of Education at the University of Nottingham, is concerned that scrapping handwritten exams in universities could prompt ''downward curriculum pressure'' on primary and secondary schools to follow suit.

(Adapted from http://www.telegraph.co.uk)

Question 35: Which of the following best serves as the title for the passage?A. Cambridge University in an Attempt to Improve Students' Handwriting B. Cambridge University Pondering Changes to its Exam PracticesC. Cambridge University Attacked again for Abolishing Written Exams D. Cambridge University to Replace Written with Oral Exams

Question 36: According to paragraph 1, Cambridge University has a long-standing tradition of______.

A. offering academic tutorials B. organising handwritten examsC. relying heavily on technology D. training students in legible handwriting

Question 37: The word ''Those'' in paragraph 2 refers to ______.A. examiners B. students C. scripts D. administrators

Question 38: The word "deteriorates'' in paragraph 3 mostly means ______.A. remains unchanged B. becomes more importantC. improves gradually D. gets worse and worse

Question 39: It can be inferred from what Sir Anthony Seldon said in paragraph 3 that ______.A. schools in the country used to have more time for handwriting practice B. schools in the country have failed to preserve the beauty of EnglishC. people's handwriting generally reflects their intelligence and linguistic competence D. the majority of doctors these days no longer write prescriptions by hand

Question 40: The word ''scrapping'' in paragraph 4 is closest in meaning to ______.A. reconsidering B. eliminating C. introducing D. discouraging Question 41: As

mentioned in paragraph 4, writing by hand can ______.A. enhance the ability to remember informationB. guarantee desirable academic performanceC. facilitate the process of information exchangeD. relieve students of unnecessary pressure

Question 42: Which of the following statements is TRUE according to the passage?A. Cambridge University’s move away from handwriting has already set an

unprecedented example for other schools to follow.B. Sarah Pearsall acknowledged handwriting as an art form to be preserved among the

current generation of students at Cambridge University.C. Sir Anthony Seldon claimed that learning to use great English was more important than

learning to write by hand beautifully.D. Most of the tutors at Cambridge are skeptical of the university's decision regarding

handwritten exams.Trang 4/5 – Mã đề thi 001

Page 98: letrungkien.edu.vnletrungkien.edu.vn/uploads/laws/tieng-anh-on-tap-thi... · Web viewPHONETICS NGỮ ÂM * PHẦN I: LÝ THUYẾT. A. PRONUNCIATION. I. NGUYÊN ÂM. 1. Giới thiệu

Mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the underlined part that needs correction in each of the following questions.Question 43: My friends and I go usually to the park on the weekend.

A B C DQuestion 44: Information on the Romans can find not only in these books but also on the Internet.

ABCD Question 45: There are a number of updated entrances in the latest edition of the encyclopedia.

A B C D

Mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the sentence that is closest in meaning to each of the following questions.Question 46: In Vietnam, football is more popular than basketball.

A. In Vietnam, basketball is not as popular as football.B. In Vietnam, basketball is more popular than football.C. In Vietnam, football is not as popular as basketball.D. In Vietnam, football is as popular as basketball.

Question 47: ''What are you going to do after school, Anne?'' Kevin asked.A. Kevin asked Anne what was she going to do after school.B. Kevin asked Anne what she was going to do after school.C. Kevin wanted to know what Anne would do after school.D. Kevin wanted to know what would Anne do after school.

Question 48: Sally paid for her travel in advance, but it wasn’t necessary.A. Sally needn't have paid for her travel in advance.B. Sally might not have paid for her travel in advance.C. Sally may not have paid for her travel in advance.D. Sally couldn’t have paid for her travel in advance.

Mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the sentence that best combines each pair of sentences in the following questions.Question 49: Jenifer rejected the job offer. She now regrets it.

A. Jenifer regrets not having rejected the job offer.B. If only Jenifer didn’t reject the job offer.C. Jenifer wishes she hadn’t rejected the job offer.D. Jenifer regrets to reject the job offer.

Question 50: Mike became a father. He felt a strong sense of responsibility towards his parents. A. Were Mike to become a father himself, he would feel a strong sense of responsibility

towards his parents.B. Only after Mike had become a father himself did he feel a strong sense of responsibility

towards his parents.C. Had Mike become a father himself, he would have felt a strong sense of responsibility

towards his parents.D. Not until he felt a strong sense of responsibility towards his parents did Mike become a

father himself.

------------------------ HẾT ------------------------

Trang 5/5 – Mã đề thi 001

Page 99: letrungkien.edu.vnletrungkien.edu.vn/uploads/laws/tieng-anh-on-tap-thi... · Web viewPHONETICS NGỮ ÂM * PHẦN I: LÝ THUYẾT. A. PRONUNCIATION. I. NGUYÊN ÂM. 1. Giới thiệu

ĐỀ 2:BỘ GIÁO DỤC VÀ ĐÀO TẠO KỲ THI TRUNG HỌC PHÔ THÔNG QUỐC GIA NĂM 2018

Bài thi: NGOẠI NGƯ; Môn thi: TIẾNG ANHĐỀ THI THAM KHẢO(Đề thi có 06 trang) Thời gian làm bài: 60 phút, không kể thời gian phát đề

Họ, tên thí sinh: ..................................................................... Mã đề thi 001Số báo danh: ..........................................................................Mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the word that differs from the other three in the position of primary stress in each of the following questions.Question 1. A. legal B. diverse C. polite D. complete Question 2. A. interview B. compliment C. sacrifice D. represent

Mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the word whose underlined part differs from the other three in pronunciation in each of the following questions.Question 3. A. mood B. flood C. spoon D. moonQuestion 4. A.listens B. reviews C. protects D. enjoys

Mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the correct answer to each of the following questions.Question 5. If he were younger, he ______ a professional running competition now.

A. will join B. had joined C. would have joined D. would joinQuestion 6. The children ______ to bed before their parents came home from work.

A. were all going B. had all goneC. had all been going D. have all gone

Question 7. Linda refused ______ in the musical performance because she was sick.A. to participate B. participate C. participating D. to participating

Question 8. There has been little rain in this area for months, ______?A. has it B. has there C. hasn’t it D. hasn’t there

Question 9. David was deported on account of his expired visa. He ______ it renewed. A. must have had B. should have had C. needn’t have had D. mightn’t have hadQuestion 10. The proposal ______ by the environmentalists to grow more trees has receivedapproval from the council.

A. which suggested B. be suggested C. suggested D. was suggestedQuestion 11. Project-based learning provides wonderful opportunities for students to develop their______.

A. creative B. creativity C. create D. creativelyQuestion 12. Violent films may have a negative ______ on children.

A. opinion B. influence C. dependence D. decisionQuestion 13. A good leader should not be conservative, but rather ______ to new ideas.

A. receptive B. acceptable C. permissive D. applicable Question 14. ______ individuals are those who share the same hobbies, interests, or points of

view. A. Light-hearted B. Like-minded C. Even-handed D. Open-minded Question 15. The child has no problem reciting the poem; he has ______ it to memory. A. devoted B. added C. committed D. admitted

Question 16. After several injuries and failures, things have eventually ______ for Todd when hereached the final round of the tournament.

A. looked up B. gone on C. taken up D. turned on

Trang 1/6 - Mã đề thi 001

Page 100: letrungkien.edu.vnletrungkien.edu.vn/uploads/laws/tieng-anh-on-tap-thi... · Web viewPHONETICS NGỮ ÂM * PHẦN I: LÝ THUYẾT. A. PRONUNCIATION. I. NGUYÊN ÂM. 1. Giới thiệu

Mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the word(s) CLOSEST in meaning to the underlined word(s) in each of the following questions.Question 17. The first few days at university can be very daunting, but with determination and positive attitude, freshmen will soon fit in with the new environment.

A. interesting B. memorable C. serious D. depressingQuestion 18. Deforestation may seriously jeopardize the habitat of many species in the local area.

A. do harm to B. set fire to C. give rise to D. make way for

Mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the word(s) OPPOSITE in meaning to the underlined word(s) in each of the following questions.Question 19. In this writing test, candidates will not be penalized for minor mechanical mistakes.

A. punished B. rewarded C. motivated D. discouraged Question 20. After their long-standing conflict had been resolved, the two families decided to

bury the hatchet.A. become enemies B. become friendsC. give up weapons D. reach an agreement

Mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the sentence that best completes each of the following exchanges.Question 21. John and Mary are talking about what to do after class.

John: “______”Mary: “Yes, I’d love to.”

A. Do you often have time for a drink after class? B. Would you like to have a drink after class?C. Do you often go out for a drink after class? D. Would you like tea or coffee after class?

Question 22. Paul and Daisy are discussing life in the future.Paul: “I believe space travel will become more affordable for many people in the future.”Daisy: “______”

A. It doesn’t matter at all.C. It is very kind of you to say so.

B. There’s no doubt about that.D. I am sorry to hear that.

Read the following passage and mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the correct word or phrase that best fits each of the numbered blanks from 23 to 27.

GOOD FRIENDSPsychologists have long known that having a set of cherished companions is crucial to

mental well-being. A recent study by Australian investigators concluded that our friends even help to (23) ______ our lives. The study concentrated (24) ______ the social environment, generalhealth, and lifestyle of 1,477 persons older than 70 years. The participants were asked how much contact they had with friends, children, relatives and acquaintances.

Researchers were surprised to learn that friendships increased life (25) ______ to a fargreater extent than frequent contact with children and other relatives. This benefit held true even after these friends had moved away to another city and was independent of factors such as socio-economic status, health, and way of life. According to scientists, the ability to have relationships with people to (26) ______ one is important has a positive effect on physical and mental health.Stress and tendency towards depression are reduced, and behaviours that are damaging to health, such as smoking and drinking, occur less frequently. (27) _______, our support networks, in times

Trang 2/6 - Mã đề thi 001

Page 101: letrungkien.edu.vnletrungkien.edu.vn/uploads/laws/tieng-anh-on-tap-thi... · Web viewPHONETICS NGỮ ÂM * PHẦN I: LÝ THUYẾT. A. PRONUNCIATION. I. NGUYÊN ÂM. 1. Giới thiệu

of calamity in particular, can raise our moods and feelings of self-worth and offer helpful strategies for dealing with difficult personal challenges.

(Source: Academic Vocabulary in Use by Michael McCarthy and Felicity O’Dell)

Question 23. A. prolong B. lengthen C. stretch D. expandQuestion 24. A. in B. with C. on D. atQuestion 25. A. expectation B. insurance C. expectancy D. assuranceQuestion 26. A. who B. whom C. what D. thatQuestion 27. A. Otherwise B. For example C. Moreover D. However

Read the following passage and mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the correct answer to each of the questions from 28 to 34.

We get great pleasure from reading. The more advanced a man is, the greater delight he will find in reading. The ordinary man may think that subjects like philosophy or science are very difficult and that if philosophers and scientists read these subjects, it is not for pleasure. But this is not true. The mathematician finds the same pleasure in his mathematics as the school boy in an adventure story. For both, it is a play of the imagination, a mental recreation and exercise.

The pleasure derived from this activity is common to all kinds of reading. But different types of books give us different types of pleasure. First in order of popularity is novel-reading. Novels contain pictures of imaginary people in imaginary situations, and give us an opportunity of escaping into a new world very much like our world and yet different from it. Here we seem to live a new life, and the experience of this new life gives us a thrill of pleasure.

Next in order of popularity are travel books, biographies and memoirs. These tell us tales of places we have not seen and of great men in whom we are interested. Some of these books are as wonderful as novels, and they have an added value that they are true. Such books give us knowledge, and we also find immense pleasure in knowing details of lands we have not seen and of great men we have only heard of.

Reading is one of the greatest enjoyments of life. To book-lovers, nothing is more fascinating than a favorite book. And, the ordinary educated man who is interested and absorbed in his daily occupation wants to occasionally escape from his drudgery into the wonderland of books for recreation and refreshment.

(Source: http://www.importantindia.com)Question 28. What does the passage mainly discuss?

A. Different types of books B. Different kinds of readingC. Reading as an exercise for the brain D. Reading as a pleasurable activity

Question 29. According to paragraph 1, which of the following is NOT true?A. Ordinary people may think that philosophy and science are difficult.B. Reading about mathematics is mentally entertaining for a mathematician.C. Philosophers and scientists do not read for pleasure.D. A more advanced person takes greater pleasure in reading.

Question 30. The word “derived” in paragraph 2 is closest in meaning to ______.A. differed B. established C. bought D. obtained

Question 31. The word “it” in paragraph 2 refers to ______.A. a new life B. our world C. an opportunity D. a thrill of pleasure

Trang 3/6 - Mã đề thi 001

Page 102: letrungkien.edu.vnletrungkien.edu.vn/uploads/laws/tieng-anh-on-tap-thi... · Web viewPHONETICS NGỮ ÂM * PHẦN I: LÝ THUYẾT. A. PRONUNCIATION. I. NGUYÊN ÂM. 1. Giới thiệu

Question 32. The word “immense” in paragraph 3 is closest in meaning to ______.A. great B. limited C. personal D. controlled

Question 33. According to the passage, travel books, biographies and memoirs ______.A. are wonderful novels B. tell stories of well-known placesC. are less popular than novels D. are more valuable than novels

Question 34. According to paragraph 4, which of the following is the most fascinating to book-lovers?

A. A daily occupation B. An ordinary educated manC. The wonderland D. A favorite book

Read the following passage and mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the correct answer to each of the questions from 35 to 42.

The system of higher education had its origin in Europe in the Middle Ages, when the first universities were established. In modern times, the nature of higher education around the world, to some extent, has been determined by the models of influential countries such as France and Germany.

Both France and Germany have systems of higher education that are basically administered by state agencies. Entrance requirements for students are also similar in both countries. In France, an examination called the baccalauréat is given at the end of secondary education. Higher education in France is free and open to all students who have passed this baccalauréat. Success in this examination allows students to continue their higher education for another three or four years until they have attained the first university degree called a licence in France.

Basic differences, however, distinguish these two countries’ systems. French educational districts, called académies, are under the direction of a rector, an appointee of the national government who is also in charge of universities in each district. The uniformity in curriculum throughout the country leaves each university with little to distinguish itself. Hence, many students prefer to go to Paris, where there are better accommodations and more cultural amenities for them. Another difference is the existence in France of prestigious higher educational institutions known as grandes écoles, which provide advanced professional and technical training. Most of these schools are not affiliated with the universities, although they too recruit their students by giving competitive examinations to candidates. The grandes écoles provide rigorous training in all branches of applied science and technology, and their diplomas have a somewhat higher standing than the ordinary licence.

In Germany, the regional universities have autonomy in determining their curriculum under the direction of rectors elected from within. Students in Germany change universities according to their interests and the strengths of each university. In fact, it is a custom for students to attend two, three, or even four different universities in the course of their undergraduate studies, and the majority of professors at a particular university may have taught in four or five others. This high degree of mobility means that schemes of study and examination are marked by a freedom and individuality unknown in France.

France and Germany have greatly influenced higher education systems around the world. The French, either through colonial influence or the work of missionaries, introduced many aspects of their system in other countries. The German were the first to stress the importance of universities as research facilities, and they also created a sense of them as emblems of a national mind.

(Source: https://britannicalearn.com)

Trang 4/6 - Mã đề thi 001

Page 103: letrungkien.edu.vnletrungkien.edu.vn/uploads/laws/tieng-anh-on-tap-thi... · Web viewPHONETICS NGỮ ÂM * PHẦN I: LÝ THUYẾT. A. PRONUNCIATION. I. NGUYÊN ÂM. 1. Giới thiệu

Question 35. What does the passage mainly discuss?A. The nature of education around the world in modern times B. Systems of higher education in France and Germany C. The origin of higher education system in EuropeD. The influence of France and Germany on educational systems of other countries

Question 36. The word “uniformity” in paragraph 3 is closest in meaning to ______.A. proximity B. discrepancy C. similarity D. uniqueness

Question 37. The word “their” in paragraph 3 refers to ______.A. schools B. universities C. examinations D. branches

Question 38. Which of the following about grandes écoles in France is NOT stated in paragraph 3? A. Most of them have no connection with universities.B. They have a reputation for advanced professional and technical training.C. Their degrees are better recognized than those provided by universities.D. They offer better accommodations and facilities than universities.

Question 39. According to the passage, a regional university rector in Germany is elected by______.

A. the staff of the university B. the national government officialsC. the regional government officials D. the staff of other universities

Question 40. According to paragraph 4, what makes it possible for students in Germany to attend different universities during their undergraduate studies?

A. The university staff have become far more mobile and occupied.B. The university’s training programs offer greater flexibility and freedom of choice.C. University tuition fees are kept at an affordable level for all students.D. Entry requirements to universities in Germany are made less demanding.

Question 41. The word “emblems” in the final paragraph is closest in meaning to ______.A. representatives B. directions C. structures D. delegates

Question 42. Which of the following can be inferred from the passage?A. Studying in France and Germany is a good choice for people of all ages and nationalities.B. It normally takes longer to complete a university course in France than in Germany.C. Universities in Germany can govern themselves more effectively than those in France.D. The level of decentralization of higher education is greater in Germany than in France.

Mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the underlined part that needs correction in each of the following questions.Question 43. Every member of the class were invited to the party by the form teacher.

A B C D

Question 44. Historically, it was the 3 rd Asian Games in Japan that tennis, volleyball, table tennis A B Cand hockey were added.

DQuestion 45. Though formally close friends, they have now been estranged from each other due to

A B C some regrettable misunderstandings.

D

Trang 5/6 - Mã đề thi 001

Page 104: letrungkien.edu.vnletrungkien.edu.vn/uploads/laws/tieng-anh-on-tap-thi... · Web viewPHONETICS NGỮ ÂM * PHẦN I: LÝ THUYẾT. A. PRONUNCIATION. I. NGUYÊN ÂM. 1. Giới thiệu

Mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the sentence that is closest in meaning to each of the following questions.Question 46. Harry no longer smokes a lot.

A. Harry now smokes a lot. B. Harry used to smoke a lot.C. Harry didn’t use to smoke a lot. D. Harry rarely smoked a lot.

Question 47. “I’ll call you as soon as I arrive at the airport,” he said to me.A. He objected to calling me as soon as he arrived at the airport.B. He promised to call me as soon as he arrived at the airport.C. He denied calling me as soon as he arrived at the airport.D. He reminded me to call him as soon as he arrived at the airport.

Question 48. People think that traffic congestion in the downtown area is due to the increasing number of private cars.

A. Traffic congestion in the downtown area is blamed for the increasing number of private cars. B. The increasing number of private cars is thought to be responsible for traffic congestion in the

downtown area.C. The increasing number of private cars is attributed to traffic congestion in the downtown area. D. Traffic congestion in the downtown area is thought to result in the increasing number of

private cars.

Mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the sentence that best combines each pair of sentences in the following questions.Question 49. The young girl has great experience of nursing. She has worked as a hospital volunteer for years.

A. Before she worked as a hospital volunteer for years, the young girl has great experience of nursing.

B. Much as she has worked as a hospital volunteer for years, the young girl has great experience of nursing.

C. Having worked as a hospital volunteer for years, the young girl has great experience of nursing.D. With great experience of nursing, the young girl has worked as a hospital volunteer for years.

Question 50. Peter told us about his leaving the school. He did it on his arrival at the meeting.A. Only after his leaving the school did Peter inform us of his arrival at the meeting.B. Not until Peter told us that he would leave the school did he arrive at the meeting.C. Hardly had Peter informed us about his leaving the school when he arrived at the meeting.D. No sooner had Peter arrived at the meeting than he told us about his leaving the school.

------------------------ THE END ------------------------

Trang 6/6 - Mã đề thi 001ĐỀ 3:

Page 105: letrungkien.edu.vnletrungkien.edu.vn/uploads/laws/tieng-anh-on-tap-thi... · Web viewPHONETICS NGỮ ÂM * PHẦN I: LÝ THUYẾT. A. PRONUNCIATION. I. NGUYÊN ÂM. 1. Giới thiệu

BỘ GIÁO DỤC VÀ ĐÀO TẠO KỲ THI TRUNG HỌC PHÔ THÔNG QUỐC GIA NĂM 2019Bài thi: NGOẠI NGƯ; Môn thi: TIẾNG ANHĐỀ THI CHÍNH THỨC

(Đề thi có 04 trang) Thời gian làm bài: 60 phút, không kể thời gian phát đề

Họ, tên thí sinh: ..................................................................... Mã đề thi 401Số báo danh: ..........................................................................

Mark the letter A, B, C or D on your answer sheet to indicate the word that differs from the other threein the position of primary stress in each of the following questions.Question 1: A. consist B. carry C. remove D. protectQuestion 2: A. solution B. principal C. passenger D. continentMark the letter A, B, C or D on your answer sheet to indicate the word whose underlined part differs from the other three in pronunciation in each of the following questions.Question 3: A. touch B. round C. ground D. shoutQuestion 4: A. combined B. travelled C. behaved D. practicedMark the letter A, B, C or D on your answer sheet to indicate the option that best completes each of the following exchanges.Question 5: A shop assistant is talking to a customer.

Shop assistant: “Do you need anything else?”Customer: “________”

A. Good job! B. That's all. Thanks. C. With pleasure. D. You're welcome.Question 6: Ann and Peter are talking about housework.

- Ann: “I think children should be paid for doing the housework.”-Peter: “________. It's their duty in the family.”

A. You're exactly right B. That's what I think C. There's no doubt about it D. I don't think so

Mark the letter A, B, C or D on your answer sheet to indicate the word(s) CLOSET in meaning to the underlined word(s) in each of the following questions.Question 7: These photos brought back many sweet memories of our trip to Hanoi last year.

A. recalled B. released C. revised D. caughtQuestion 8: At first, John said he hadn't broken the vase, but later he accepted it.

A. denied B. discussed C. protected D. admittedMark the letter A, B, C or D on your answer sheet to indicate the word(s) OPPOSITE in meaning to the underlined word(s) in each of the following questions.Question 9: Children brought up in a caring environment tend to grow more sympathetic towards others.

A. loving B. dishonest C. healthy D. hatefulQuestion 10: It's quite disappointing that some people still turn a blind eye to acts of injustice they witness in the street.

A. take no notice of B. have no feeling for C. show respect for D.pay attention to

Mark the letter A, B, C or D on your answer sheet to indicate the correct answer to each of the following questions.Question 11: As they remembered ________ about the danger of getting lost in the forest, the touristsclosely followed the tour guide.

A. being warned B. warning C. to be warned D. to warnQuestion 12: Once ________ for viruses, the software can be installed in the school computer system foruse.

A. has tested B. is tested C. testing D. tested Question 13: The teacher entered the room while the students ________ their plan for the excursion.

A. discuss B. were discussing C. discussed D. are discussingQuestion 14: His choice of future career is quite similar ________ mine.

A. with B. at C. for D. toQuestion 15: With his good sense of humour, Martin is quite ________ with the students.

A. popularity B. popular C. popularize D. popularlyQuestion 16: The residents of the village are living a happy life ________ they lack modern facilities.

Trang 1/4 - Mã đề thi 401

A. because of B. although C. therefore D. despite

Page 106: letrungkien.edu.vnletrungkien.edu.vn/uploads/laws/tieng-anh-on-tap-thi... · Web viewPHONETICS NGỮ ÂM * PHẦN I: LÝ THUYẾT. A. PRONUNCIATION. I. NGUYÊN ÂM. 1. Giới thiệu

Question 17: Action films with big stars tend to ________ great public attention.A. achieve B. show C. attract D. reach

Question 18: This is ________ most beautiful song I've ever listened to.A. an B. a C. the D. Ø

Question 19: The scientists are working on a drug capable of ________ the spread of cancerous cells.A. arresting B. catching C. seizing D. grasping

Question 20: The little boy took an instant liking to his babysitter ________.A. upon their first meeting B. before he first met herC. prior to their first meeting D. as soon as he meets her

Question 21: It's time he acted like a ________ adult and stopped blaming others for his wrongdoings.A. responsible B. sociable C. believable D. suitable

Question 22: We ________ on a field trip if the weather is fine this weekend.A. could have gone B. will go C. would go D. went

Question 23: One recipe for success is to stay focused and ________ yourself to whatever you do.A. apply B. attach C. assign D. adhere

Question 24: It's not my ________ to tell you how to run your life, but I think you should settle down andhave a family.

A. work B. chore C. job D. careerRead the following passage and mark the letter A, B, C or D on your answer sheet to indicate the correct word or phrase that best fits each of the numbered blanks from 25 to 29.

Becoming an independent language learnerIn an educational context, the term “learner independence” has gained increasing importance in recent years. It is of particular (25) ________ to language learning and commonly refers to the way students confidently control and organize their own language learning process. While some people seem to have an almost (26)________ flair for languages, others have rely on strategies to maximize their skills and learn a foreignlanguage more effectively. The main thing to remember is that becoming a truly independent learner ultimately depends above all on taking responsibility for your own learning and being prepared to take every opportunity available to you to learn. You also increase your chances of (27) ________ by learning according to your own needs and interests, using all available resources. Research shows that learners (28) ________ adopt this approach will undoubtedly manage to broaden their language abilities considerably and, (29) ________, are more likely to achieve their objectives in the longer term.

(Adopted from “Complete Advanced” by Laura Malthews and Barbara Thomas)Question 25: A. resemblance B. relevance C. acquaintance D. acceptanceQuestion 26: A. habitual B. spiritual C. perceptive D. instinctiveQuestion 27: A. successfully B. successful C. succeed D. successQuestion 28: A. who B. why C. where D. whichQuestion 29: A. as a result B. in contrast C. though D. becauseRead the following passage and mark the letter A, B, C or D on your answer sheet to indicate the correct answer to each of the questions from 30 to 34.

Tribal tourism is a relatively new type of tourism. It involves travelers going to remote destinations, staying with local people and learning about their culture and way of life. They stay in local accommodation, share facilities with local people, and join in with meals and celebrations. At the moment, less than one percent of holidays are tribal tourism holidays, but this is set to change.

Tribal tourism is often compared with foreign exchange visits. However, a foreign exchange involves staying with people who often share the same values. Tribal tourism takes visitors to places where the lifestyle is very different from that in their home location. Those who have been on tribal holiday explain that experiencing this lifestyle is the main attraction. They say that it offers them the chance to live in a way they never have before. Not everyone is convinced that tribal tourism is a good thing, and opinions are divided. The argument is about whether or not it helps the local population, or whether it exploits them. The main problem is that, because tribal tourism is relatively new, the long-term influences on local populations have not been studied in much detail. Where studies have been carried out, the effects have been found to be negative.

So, is it possible to experience an exotic culture without harming it in some way? “With a bit of thought, we can maximise the positive influences and minimise the negative”, says travel company director

Trang 2/4 - Mã đề thi 401Hilary Waterhouse. “The most important thing for a tribal tourist is to show respect for, learn about, and be aware of, local customs and traditions. Always remember you're a guest.”

Page 107: letrungkien.edu.vnletrungkien.edu.vn/uploads/laws/tieng-anh-on-tap-thi... · Web viewPHONETICS NGỮ ÂM * PHẦN I: LÝ THUYẾT. A. PRONUNCIATION. I. NGUYÊN ÂM. 1. Giới thiệu

(Adopted from “Complete IELTS” by Rawdon Wyatt)Question 30: Which best serves as the title for the passage?

A. An Old Tourist Destination B. Holidays with a DifferenceC. Different Customs of a Tribe D. Peak Holiday Seasons

Question 31: The word “They” in paragraph 1 refers to ________.A. travellers B. facilities C. local people D. remote destinations

Question 32: According to paragraph 2, what is the main attraction of tribal tourism?A. Tourists can stay with people of the same values. B. Tourists can interact with other foreign visitors.C. Tourists can experience a different lifestyle. D. Tourists can explore beauty spots in remote areas.

Question 33: The word “divided” in paragraph 3 is closest in meaning to ________. A. similar B. important C. different D. interesting Question 34: According to Hilary Waterhouse, the most important thing for a tribal tourist is to ________.

A. forget about negative experiences B. respect local customs and traditions C. learn about other guests D. be accompanied by other travellers

Read the following passage and mark the letter A, B, C or D on your answer sheet to indicate the correct answer to each of the questions from 35 to 42.

E-waste is being produced on a scale never seen before. Computers and other electronic equipment become obsolete in just a few years, leaving customers with little choice but to buy newer ones to keep up. Millions of tons of computers, TVs, smartphones, and other equipment are discarded each year. In most countries, all this waste ends up in landfills, where it poisons the environment - e-waste contains many toxic substances such as lead, mercury, and arsenic, that leak into the ground.

Recycling is the ideal solution to the problem. E-waste contains significant amounts of valuable metals like gold and silver that make it attractive to recycle. In theory, recycling gold from old computers is more efficient - and less environmentally destructive - than digging it from the earth. The problem is that a large percentage of e-waste dropped off for recycling in wealthy countries is sold an diverted to the developing world, posing an increasing threat to the health of the people there.

To address the problem of the international trade in e-waste, 170 nations signed the 1989 Basel Convention, an agreement requiring that developed nations notify developing nations of hazardous waste shipments coming into their countries. Then, in 1995 the Basel Convention was modified to ban hazardous waste shipments to poor countries completely. Although the ban hasn't taken effect, the European Union, where recycling infrastructure is well developed, has already written it into their laws. One law holds manufacturers responsible for the sale disposal of electronics they produce.

Companies like Creative Recycling Systems in Florida, the USA, are hoping to profit from clean e-waste recycling. The key to their business is a huge, building-size machine able to separate electronic products into their component materials. As the machine's steel teeth break up e-waste, all the toxic dust is removed from the process. This machine can handle some 70,000 tons of electronics a year. Although this is only a fraction of the total, it wouldn't take many more machines like this to process the entire USA's output of high-tech trash.

Unfortunately, under current policies, domestic processing of e-waste is not compulsory, and while shipping waste abroad is ethically questionable, it is still more profitable than processing it safely in the USA. Creative Recycling Systems is hoping that the US government will soon create laws deterring people from sending e-waste overseas.

(Adopted from “Reading Explorer 4” by Paul MacIntyre and Nancy Hubley)

Question 35: Which best serves as the title for the passage?A. Waste Recycling: A Storm in a Teacup B. Domestic Recycling: Pros and ConsC. E-waste - An Export Commodity of the Future D. E-waste - A Mess to Clear up

Question 36: The word “obsolete” in paragraph 1 is closest in meaning to ________.A. outdated B. inaccurate C. broken D. incomplete

Question 37: As stated in paragraph 2, a large percentage of e-waste meant for recycling in the developedcountries ________.

A. is buried deep in the soil at landfills B. contains all valuable metals except goldC. is later recycled in local factories D. is eventually sent to developing nations

Trang 3/4 - Mã đề thi 401Question 38: The word “notify” in paragraph 3 is closest in meaning to ________.

A. assure B. notice C. excuse D. informQuestion 39: The word “it” in paragraph 3 refers to ________.

Page 108: letrungkien.edu.vnletrungkien.edu.vn/uploads/laws/tieng-anh-on-tap-thi... · Web viewPHONETICS NGỮ ÂM * PHẦN I: LÝ THUYẾT. A. PRONUNCIATION. I. NGUYÊN ÂM. 1. Giới thiệu

A. the ban B. recycling infrastructure C. the European Union D. the Basel ConventionQuestion 40: According to the European Union's laws, electronics manufacturers are required to ________.

A. upgrade their recycling infrastructure regularlyB. sell their e-waste to developed nations onlyC. sign the Basel ConventionD. take responsibility for disposing of their products safely

Question 41: Which of the following statements is TRUE, according to the passage?A. The USA's total e-waste output amounts to 70,000 tons per year.B. Creative Recycling Systems has made a fortune from their recycling machine.C. The Basel Convention originally banned the import of high-tech trash into European countries.D. Shipping e-waste abroad yields greater profit than recycling it safely in the USA.

Question 42: Which of the following can be inferred from the passage?A. Most countries have made enormous efforts to manage their e-waste exports.B. Legislative action is fundamental to solving the problem of e-waste effectively.C. Strict laws against sending e-waste abroad have recently been upheld in Florida.D. Developing nations benefit more from the trade in e-waste than their developed counterparts.

Mark the letter A, B, C or D on your answer sheet to indicate the sentence that best combines each pair of sentences in the following questions.Question 43: Peter moved abroad for a fresh start. He regrets it now.

A. If only Peter had moved abroad for a fresh start.B. Peter wishes he hadn't moved abroad for a fresh start.C. If Peter moved abroad for a fresh start, he would regret it.D. Peter regrets not having moved abroad for a fresh start.

Question 44: Smartphones are becoming reasonably priced. New applications make them more appealing.A. Appealing though smartphones are with new applications, they are becoming less affordably priced.

B. Whatever new applications smartphones have, they are becoming more appealing with reasonable prices.C. No matter how reasonable the prices of smartphones are, they are not so appealing with new applications.D. Not only are smartphones becoming more affordable cut, with new applications, they are also more

appealing.Mark the letter A, B, C or D on your answer sheet to indicate the sentence that is closest in meaning to each of the following questions.Question 45: It was wrong of you to criticise your son in front of his friends.

A. You shouldn't have criticised your son in front of his friends.B. You must have criticised your son in front of his friends.C. You mightn't have criticised your son in front of his friends.D. You could have criticised your son in front of his friends.

Question 46: My father likes reading newspapers more than watching TV.A. My father doesn't like watching TV as much as reading newspapers.B. My father likes watching TV more than reading newspapers.C. My father doesn't like reading newspapers as much as watching TV.D. My father likes watching TV as much as reading newspapers.

Question 47: “How long have you lived here, Lucy?” asked Jack.A. Jack asked Lucy how long did she live here. B. Jack asked Lucy how long she had lived there.C. Jack asked Lucy how long she lived here. D. Jack asked Lucy how long had she lived there.

Mark the letter A, B, C or D on your answer sheet to indicate the underlined part that needs correction in each of the following questions.Question 48: At the beginning of the ceremony, there was a respectable one-minute silence

A Bin remembrance of the victims of the earthquake.

C DQuestion 49: My mother gets up usually early to prepare breakfast for the whole family.

A B C DQuestion 50: The money raised in the appeal will use to help those in need in remote areas. A B C D

----------------------- HẾT -------------------- Trang 4/4 - Mã đề thi 401

Page 109: letrungkien.edu.vnletrungkien.edu.vn/uploads/laws/tieng-anh-on-tap-thi... · Web viewPHONETICS NGỮ ÂM * PHẦN I: LÝ THUYẾT. A. PRONUNCIATION. I. NGUYÊN ÂM. 1. Giới thiệu

ĐỀ 4: SỞ GD- ĐT PHÚ YÊN Trường THPT …………..

(Đề thi tham khảo có 5 trang)

ĐỀ KHẢO SÁT NĂNG LỰC HỌC SINH LỚP 12 Môn: TIẾNG ANH

Thời gian làm bài: 60 phút, không kể thời gian phát đề

Họ, tên thí sinh: .....................................................................Số báo danh: ..........................................................................

Mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the word whose underlined part differs from the other three in pronunciation in each of the following questions.Question 1: A. podium B. scoreboard C. opponent D. soldierQuestion 2: A. hesitation B. tsunami C. catastrophe D. windsurfingMark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the word that differs from the other three in the position of primary stress in each of the following questions.Question 3: A. answer B. appeal C. eject D. defendQuestion 4: A. conference B. penalty C. precision D. countrymanMark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the correct answer to each of the following questions.Question 5: She is ___ eldest in her house, so she has to look after her brothers when her parents go out.

A. a B. an C. no article D. theQuestion 6: ______from him, we would have asked him to come back for a home visit.

A. Had we heard anything B. Had anything we heardC. We had anything heard D. Anything we had heard

Question 7: When my friend called me last night, I ______ my favourite show on television.A. was watching B. watched C. watch D. have watched

Question 8: The prime minister will impose a tariff ______ domestic interests are being threatened by a flood of imports.

A. in spite ofB. as C. despite D. ever sinceQuestion 9: She prefers carnations ______ roses. In fact, she dislikes roses.

A. from B. over C. to D. thanQuestion 10: Penicillin, probably ______, came into widespread use after the Second World War.

A. knowing as an antibiotic B. the best known antibioticC. was known the antibiotic D. known best antibiotic

Question 11: The children ______ by social networks are likely to suffer from depression and other health problems.

A. are obsessed B. obsessing C. who obsessed D. obsessedQuestion 12: He was made _______ his homework before playing the piano.

A. to finish B. finishing C. finish D. finishedQuestion 13: Failure is simply the opportunity to begin again more _______.

A. intelligent B. intelligence C. intelligently D. intellectQuestion 14: Factories must treat all the harmful pollutants properly before ______ them into the environment.

A. relieving B. disclosing C. publishing D. dischargingQuestion 15: I am so sorry! I didn't break that necklace _______.

A. on purpose B. for a change C. in order D. at a lossQuestion 16: Meditation can do ______ for both of your physical and mental health.

A. goods B. benefits C. advantages D. wondersQuestion 17: To maintain good health, we should regularly do exercise and _____ junk food.

A. cut up to B. keep up to C. cut down on D. keep down onQuestion 18: The phrase has become almost _______.

A. meaningless B. jobless C. tasteless D. carelessMark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the word(s) CLOSEST in meaning to the underlined word(s) in each of the following questions.Question 19: I can't picture life on an isolated island without running water and electricity.

Mã đề: 123

Page 110: letrungkien.edu.vnletrungkien.edu.vn/uploads/laws/tieng-anh-on-tap-thi... · Web viewPHONETICS NGỮ ÂM * PHẦN I: LÝ THUYẾT. A. PRONUNCIATION. I. NGUYÊN ÂM. 1. Giới thiệu

A. decide B. imagine C. surprise D. introduceQuestion 20: I am becoming increasingly absent-minded. Last week, I locked myself out of the house twice.

A. careful        B. mindless C. forgetful  D. forgettableMark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the word(s) OPPOSITE in meaning to the underlined word(s) in each of the following questions.Question 21: They will talk to us about the new project in detail.

A. soon         B. briefly            C. slowly       D. rapidlyQuestion 22: The floods have made the whole village inaccessible.

A. solvable B. capable C. probable D. approachableMark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the most suitable response to complete each of the following exchanges.Question 23: Ben is thanking Anne for the birthday present.

- Ben: “What a lovely watch! Thank you so much!” - Anne: “____________________” A. Yes. It is extremely expensive. B. Yes. It is very difficult to find.C. Yes. It is really lovely. D. You're welcome. I am glad you like it.

Question 24: Linda and Mary are talking about the development of robots.- Linda: “Do you think that robots can do the housework for people in the future?”

- Mary: “_________________________________”A. Sorry, I can't. I don't like robots. B. Why not? Robots have been used in helping people with it now.C. What for? There have been quite a few robots around here.D. I am really happy that you also like to have robots in homes.

Read the following passage and mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the correct word or phrase that best fits each of the numbered blanks.

Do you ever wish you were more optimistic, someone who always expected to be successful? Having someone around (25) _____ always fears the worst isn't really a lot of fun - we all know someone who sees a single cloud on a sunny day and says, "It looks like rain". But if you catch yourself thinking such things, it's important to do something about it.

You can change your view of life, according to psychologists. It only takes a little (26) _____, and you will find life more rewarding as a result. Optimism, they say, is partly about self-respect and (27) _____ but it's also a more positive way of looking at life and all it has to result offer. Optimists are more likely to start new projects and generally more prepared to take risks.

Upbringing is obviously very important (28) _____ forming your attitude to the world. Some people are brought up to depend too much on others and grow up forever blaming other people when anything goes wrong. Most optimists, (29) ______, have been brought up not to regard failure as the end of the world - they just get on with their lives.Question 25: A. which B. who C. what D. whomQuestion 26: A. effort B. effect C. energy D. workQuestion 27: A. confident B. confidence C. confidently D. confideQuestion 28: A. from B. of C. in D. withQuestion 29: A. as a result B. so that C. even though D. on the other handRead the following passage and mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the correct answer to each of the questions.

Football, or soccer in the U.S., dates back to 2500 B.C. with the Chinese game of tsu chu. The sport we know today originated from Britain. Today, more than 120 million players over the globe participate in the game, making soccer the world's sport.

So, why is soccer so popular? Maybe it's the feeling that the team on the field is your team; their win is your victory, and their loss is your defeat. Or maybe it is the game's international quality. In countries like France, England, Spain, Brazil, major teams have players from many different nations, and these clubs now have fans all over the world. Or perhaps it's the promise of great wealth. A number of professional soccer players, including Cameroon's Samuel Eto's and Portugal's Cristiano Rolnado, come from poor families. Today, both of these players make millions of euros every year.

Page 111: letrungkien.edu.vnletrungkien.edu.vn/uploads/laws/tieng-anh-on-tap-thi... · Web viewPHONETICS NGỮ ÂM * PHẦN I: LÝ THUYẾT. A. PRONUNCIATION. I. NGUYÊN ÂM. 1. Giới thiệu

However, ultimately, the main reason for its universal appeal may be this: It's a simple game. It can be played anywhere with anything - a ball, a can, or even some bags tied together. And anyone can play it.

In the mid-1800s, European colonists brought the game to Africa. Early matches were first played in the South African cities of Cape Town in 1862. Today, some of the game's best players come from African nations and all over the continent, thousands of soccer academies now recruit boys from poorer cities and towns to play the game. Their team is to join a national team or one of the big clubs in Europe someday. For some, the dream comes true, but for most, it doesn't.Question 30: What is the passage mainly about?

A. The history of soccer B. Soccer clubsC. The popularity of soccer D. How African soccer began

Question 31: According to the passage, where did soccer that we know today originate from?A. Britain B. China C. Africa D. France

Question 32: In the 2nd paragraph, which of these is NOT given as a possible reason for soccer's popularity?A. The team spirit among players B. Famous players from many different countriesC. The possibility of making a lot of money D. The number of soccer games shown on TV

Question 33: What does the author mean by "It's a simple game." in paragraph 3?A. The rules are easy for people to understand. B. You don't need talent to play soccer well.C. You can play it anywhere with anything. D. There are many local versions of soccer.

Question 34: What does the word "some" in the last sentence of paragraph 4 refer to? A. poor boys B. soccer academies C. national team D. cities and towns

Read the following passage and mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the correct answer to each of the questions.

Pangolins, or scaly-anteaters, are nearing extinction, thanks to the illegal trade of their meat and scales, which are in demand, most especially in China, Vietnam and some parts of Southeast Asia. The meat of pangolins is believed to have medicinal properties. It scales, on the other hand, are popular as delicacy in South Africa.

The Convention on International Trade in Endangered Species of Wild Fauna and Flora (CITES) has already banned transporting of pangolins across borders, but that does not stop the illegal activities in the region. Last year, a speeding car in Vietnam was apprehended by authorities but they were surprised on what they found after inspecting the vehicle: 118 critically endangered pangolins cramped with no food or water. Save Vietnam's Wildlife (SVW) was called to rescue and assess the situation. The national non-profit organization (NGO) is dedicated to protecting plants, animals and vital natural resources of this Southeast Asian nation. The volunteers quickly unwrapped the pangolins and found out that five of them already died. SVW is taking recaptured pangolins under its care until they are strong enough to be released into the wild. However, taking care of them is not cheap. Pangolins consume 35 kg of food every day, which is equivalent to $135 per day.

The mission of SVW is simple: "Environmental harmony between people and nature in Vietnam where wildlife is given the opportunity to flourish." And they can't do this alone. They need all the help they can get so they can continue serving the community's best interests. Aside from saving endangered species, Save Vietnam's Wildlife is also focusing on nature conservation. As wildlife gets released back into the natural habitat, the cycle will not stop if they live in less ideal situation. SVW is doing field work and education drives in order for people to realize how critical it is for Vietnam to protect pangolins. In reality, there is also an economic aspect in this issue because people rely on illegal pangolin trading as it can fetch quick and big money. Most of the time, these illegal hunters continue this practice because they don't have any real job and most of the "skills" are just passed on to them.Question 35: What are pangolins usually called?

A. Strange species B. Medicinal properties C. Scary animals D. Scaly-anteatersQuestion 36: Where are pangolins' scales most popular?

A. China B. South Asia C. Africa D. VietnamQuestion 37: How many pangolins were found on a car across Vietnam's border last year?

A. 5 B. 35 C. 118 D. 135Question 38: Which organization has banned transporting of pangolins across borders?

A. CITES B. ASEAN C. NGO D. SVWQuestion 39: Which of the following is NOT mentioned as an activity of Save Vietnam's Wildlife?

Page 112: letrungkien.edu.vnletrungkien.edu.vn/uploads/laws/tieng-anh-on-tap-thi... · Web viewPHONETICS NGỮ ÂM * PHẦN I: LÝ THUYẾT. A. PRONUNCIATION. I. NGUYÊN ÂM. 1. Giới thiệu

A. Saving endangered species B. Finding other jobs for huntersC. Doing field work and education drives D. Conserving the nature

Question 40: What does the word "they" in the last paragraph refer to?A. Save Vietnam's Wildlife staff B. Endangered speciesC. Illegal hunters D. The community's interests

Question 41: What is the word "cramped" in paragraph 2 closest in meaning to?A. Packed B. Raised C. Provided D. Travelled

Question 42: What is the tone of the passage?A. Critical B. Humorous C. Indifferent D. Pessimistic

Mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the underlined part that needs correction in each of the following questions.Question 43: Wise (A) man speak because they (B) have something (C) to say; fools speak because (D) they have to say something.Question 44: (A) Despite many young people nowadays like (B) to communicate through the Internet, I, myself, (C) prefer face-to-face (D) communication.Question 45: She dedicated her (A) efforts and time (B) for taking care (C) of people with (D) disabilities in the neighbourhood.Mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the sentence that is closest in meaning to each of the following questions.Question 46: No one knows the identity of the woman in the picture.

A. No one knows how to identify the woman in the picture. B. The woman is well-known by everybody for her picture.C. It is unknown who drew that picture of a woman.D. No one knows who the woman in the picture is.

Question 47: We are going to get into hot water when we arrive home.A. We are going to have a nice hot bath at home. B. When we get home, we are going to have trouble.C. We have to boil water when we arrive home. D. The water will have become hot by the time we get home. Question 48: Fansipan is the highest mountain in the Indochinese Peninsula.

A. No mountains in the Indochinese Peninsula are higher than Fansipan. B. There are some mountains in the Indochinese Peninsula higher than Fansipan.C. The highest mountain in the Indochinese Peninsula is exclusive Fansipan. D. The Indochinese Peninsula includes one of the highest mountain on earth.

Mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the sentence that best combines each pair of sentences in the following questions.Question 49: She organized her work thoroughly. She accomplished it very little.

A. If she organized her work thoroughly, she could accomplish it very little.B. Because she organized her work thoroughly, she accomplished it very little.C. Though she organized her work thoroughly, she accomplished it very little.D. Once she organized her work thoroughly, she accomplished it very little.

Question 50: Life is short. It is up to you to make it sweet.A. No matter how sweet your life is, it is short. B. Life is short, and it is you that make it sweet. C. It is short to know how sweet your life is. D. However short your life can be, it is sweet.

___________THE END__________

ĐỀ 5:BỘ GIÁO DỤC VÀ ĐÀO TẠO KỲ THI THỬ THPT QUỐC GIA NĂM 2020

Bài thi: NGOẠI NGƯ; Môn thi: TIẾNG ANHĐỀ THI THỬ(Đề thi có 04 trang) Thời gian làm bài: 60 phút, không kể thời gian phát đề

Page 113: letrungkien.edu.vnletrungkien.edu.vn/uploads/laws/tieng-anh-on-tap-thi... · Web viewPHONETICS NGỮ ÂM * PHẦN I: LÝ THUYẾT. A. PRONUNCIATION. I. NGUYÊN ÂM. 1. Giới thiệu

Họ, tên thí sinh: ..................................................................... Mã đề thi 401Số báo danh: ..........................................................................

Mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the word whose underlined part differs from the other three in pronunciation in each of the following questions. Question 1: A. misses B. goes C. leaves D. potatoes Question 2: A. fifteenth B. mouth C. southern D. author

Mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the word that differs from the other three in the position of primary stress in each of the following questions. Question 3: A. contact B. concert C. constant D. concernQuestion 4: A. occupation B. miraculous C. determine D. diversity

Mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the correct answer to each of the following questions. Question 5: My uncle’s company made a very good profit in _______________.

A. the 1990 B. 1990s C. 1990’s D. the 1990sQuestion 6: Unless you ______________ all of my questions, I can’t do anything to help you.

A. answered B. answer C. don’t answer D. are answeringQuestion 7: He _____________ a terrible accident while he _______________ along Ben Luc Bridge.

A. see / am walking B. saw / was walking C. was seeing / walked D. have seen / were walkingQuestion 8: We all felt cold, wet and hungry; _________________ , we were lost.

A. moreover B. although C. however D. so thatQuestion 9: The public are concerned _______________ the increasing crime rates in the city.

A. with B. at C. about D. for Question 10: Standing on top of the hill, ____________________.

A. people have seen a castle far away B. lies a castle in the middle of the island C. a castle can be seen from the distance D. we can see a castle in the distance

Question 11: ____________ one of the most beautiful forms of performance art, ballet is a combination of dance and mime performed to music

A. Being considering B. Considering C. Considered D. To considerQuestion 12: I was enjoying my book, but I stopped ______________________ a programme on TV.

A. reading to watch B. to read to watch C. to read for watching D. reading for to watchQuestion 13: The _______________ dressed woman in the advertisement has a posed smile on her face.

A. stylish B. stylishly C. stylistic D. stylisticallyQuestion 14: Students can _________ a lot of information just by attending class and taking good notes of the lectures.

A. absorb B. provide C. transmit D. readQuestion 15: Make sure you __________________ us a visit when you are in town again.

A. give B. do C. pay D. haveQuestion 16: The play lasted two hours with a/an ____________ of 15 minutes between part one and part two.

A. interval B. pause C. stop D. interruption Question 17: When he went to Egypt, he knew ______________ no Arabic, but within 6 months he had become extremely fluent.

A. entirely B. barely D. scarcely D. virtuallyQuestion 18: ___________________ are that stock price will go up in the coming months.

A. Conditions B. Opportunities C. Possibilities D. Chances

Mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the word(s) CLOSEST in meaning to the underlined word(s) in each of the following questions. Question 19: To absorb a younger workforce, many companies offered retirement plans as incentives for older workers to retire and make way for the young ones who earned lower salary.

A. rewards B. opportunities C. motives D. encouragementsQuestion 20: How on earth could they do away with a lovely old building like that and put a car park there instead?

A. keep B. destroy C. decrease D. upgrade

Page 114: letrungkien.edu.vnletrungkien.edu.vn/uploads/laws/tieng-anh-on-tap-thi... · Web viewPHONETICS NGỮ ÂM * PHẦN I: LÝ THUYẾT. A. PRONUNCIATION. I. NGUYÊN ÂM. 1. Giới thiệu

Mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the word(s) OPPOSITE in meaning to the underlined word(s) in each of the following questions. Question 21: Most universities have trained counselors who can reassure and console students who have academic or personal problems.

A. satisfy B. sympathize C. please D. discourageQuestion 22: I don’t know what they are going to ask in the job interview. I’ll just play it by ear.

A. plan well in advance B. be careful about it C. listen to others saying D. do not plan beforehand Mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the most suitable response to complete each of the following exchanges. Question 23: Tom is apologizing to Peter for being late.- Tom: “Sorry, I’m late, Peter. My car has broken down on the way here.”- Peter: “___________________”

A. No, I wouldn’t mind at all. B. Not on my account. C. That’s all right. D. Well, it’s worth a try.Question 24: Two friends, Peter and Linda, are talking about pets.

- Peter: “Well, cats are very good at catching mice around the house”- Linda: “___________________”

A. Nothing more to say. B. You can say that again. C. Yes, I hope so. D. No, dogs are good, too.

Read the following passage and mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the correct word or phrase that best fits each of the numbered blanks.

The invention of the mobile phone has undoubtedly revolutionized the way people communicate and influenced every aspect of our lives. The issue is whether this technological innovation has (25) ______ more harm than good. In order to answer the question, we must first turn to the types of consumers. Presumably, most parents (26) ______ are always worrying about their children’s safety buy mobile phones for them to track their whereabouts. We can also assume that most teenagers want mobile phones to avoid missing out on social contact. In this context, the advantages are clear. (27) ________, we cannot deny the fact that text messages have been used by bullies to intimidate fellow students. There is also (28) ________ evidence that texting has affected literacy skills.

The widespread use of mobile phone has, out of question, affected adult consumers too. What employee, on the way home from work, would be reluctant to answer a call from their boss? Apparently, only 18% of us, according to a survey, are willing to switch off our mobile phones once we've left the office.

Admittedly, mobile phones can be intrusive but there are obvious benefits to possessing one. Personally speaking, they are invaluable when it comes to making social or business arrangements at short (29) _______. They also provide their owners with a sense of security in emergency situations. Question 25: A. done B. played C. made D. brought Question 26: A. which B. whom C. who D. what Question 27: A. Moreover B. However C. Therefore D. So thatQuestion 28: A. indisputable B. arguable C. doubtless D. unhesitating Question 29: A. time B. warning C. term D. notice

Read the following passage and mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the correct answer to each of the questions.

In Africa, people celebrate with joy the birth of a new baby. The Pygmies would sing a birth-song to the child. In Kenya, the mother takes the baby strapped to her back into the thorn enclosure where the cattle are kept. There, her husband and the village elders wait to give the child his or her name.

In West Africa, after the baby is eight days old, the mother takes the baby for its first walk in the big, wide world, and friends and family are invited to meet the new baby. In various African nations, they hold initiation ceremonies for groups of children instead of birthdays. When children reach a certain designated age, they learn the laws, beliefs, customs, songs and dances of their tribes. Some African tribes consider that children from nine to twelve are ready to be initiated into the grown up world. They may have to carry out several tests.

Maasai boys around thirteen years old to seventeen undergo a two-stage initiation. The first stage lasts about three months. The boys leave their parents' homes, paint their bodies white, and are taught how to become young warriors. At the end of this stage, they have their heads shaved and they are also circumcised. At the second stage, the young warriors grow their hair long and live in a camp called a “manyatta” where they practice hunting the wild animals that might attack the Maasai herds. This stage may last a few years. When they are ready, they will marry and become owners of large cattle herds like their fathers. The girls are initiated when they are fourteen or fifteen. They are taught by the older women about the duties of marriage and how to care for babies. Soon after that they are married and lead a life similar to that of their mothers.

Page 115: letrungkien.edu.vnletrungkien.edu.vn/uploads/laws/tieng-anh-on-tap-thi... · Web viewPHONETICS NGỮ ÂM * PHẦN I: LÝ THUYẾT. A. PRONUNCIATION. I. NGUYÊN ÂM. 1. Giới thiệu

Question 30: What does the passage mainly discuss? A. Celebrations in Africa. B. Birthday ceremonies for children in Africa. C. Traditions of Maasai people when having a new baby. D. Activities in a birth celebration.

Question 31: Where do people in Kenya give the name to the child? A. at the village church B. on the cattle farm C. at their house D. near the thorn fence

Question 32: Which of the following is NOT mentioned in paragraph 2? A. An eight-day-old child will be taken for the first walk by his or her mother. B. Children have to learn their tribes' cultures and traditions when they are old enough. C. Children are initiated for a mature life in the presence of their friends and family. D. Children have to overcome a few trials to enter the grown-up world.

Question 33: The word "undergo" in paragraph 3 is closest in meaning to ______________.A. commence B. experience C. participate in D. explore

Question 34: What does the word "they" in paragraph 3 refer to? A. the Maasai herds B. the wild animals C. the young warriors D. the cattle owners

Read the following passage and mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the correct answer to each of the questions.

What picture do you have of the future? Will life in the future be better, worse or the same as now? What do you hope about the future?

Futurologists predict that life will probably be very different in 2050 in all the fields, from entertainment to technology. First of all, it seems that TV channels will have disappeared. Instead, people will choose a program from a 'menu' and a computer will send the program directly to the television. Today, we can use the World Wide Web to read newspaper stories and see pictures on a computer thousands of kilometers away. By 2050, music, films, programs, newspapers and books will come to us by computer.

In what concerns the environment, water will have become one of our most serious problems. In many places, agriculture is changing and farmers are growing fruit and vegetables to export. This uses a lot of water. Demand for water will increase ten times between now and 2050 and there could be serious shortages. Some futurologists predict that water could be the cause of war if we don't act now.

In transport, cars running on new, clean fuels will have computers to control the speed and there won't be any accidents. Today, many cars have computers that tell drivers exactly where they are. By 2050, the computer will control the car and drive it to your destination. On the other hand, space planes will take people halfway around the world in two hours. Nowadays, the United States Shuttle can go into space and land on Earth again. By 2050, space planes will fly all over the world and people will fly from Los Angeles to Tokyo in just two hours.

In the domain of technology, robots will have replaced people in factories. Many factories already use robots. Big companies prefer robots - they do not ask for pay rises or go on strike, and they work 24 hours a day. By 2050, we will see robots everywhere - in factories, schools, offices, hospitals, shops and homes.

Last but not least, medicine technology will have conquered many diseases. Today, there are electronic devices that connect directly to the brain to help people hear. By 2050, we will be able to help blind and deaf people see and hear again. Scientists have discovered how to control genes. They have already produced clones of animals. By 2050, scientists will be able to produce clones of people and decide how they look, how they behave and how much intelligence they have. Question 35: The passage mainly discusses ________________. A. The effect of the futurologists' prediction on our lives. B. The effect of telecommunication on our future life. C. The changes in our future life compared with our life today. D. The importance of cloning in the future. Question 36: What can be inferred about the life in 2050 according to the passage? A. Life in 2050 will be much better than that of today. B. TV will be an indispensable means of communication and business. C. People will not suffer from the shortage of water due to the polar melting. D. The deaf will not have to depend any longer on the electronic hearing devices. Question 37: We can conclude from the passage that in 2050 ________________. A. People will be able to travel around the world in two hours. B. Fewer cars will be used to keep the environment green and clean. C. No one will be injured or die because of accidents. D. Space planes will take the place of cars as a means of transport.Question 38: The word "This" in paragraph 3 refers to __________________. A. the possible war. B. the cash crop planting.

Page 116: letrungkien.edu.vnletrungkien.edu.vn/uploads/laws/tieng-anh-on-tap-thi... · Web viewPHONETICS NGỮ ÂM * PHẦN I: LÝ THUYẾT. A. PRONUNCIATION. I. NGUYÊN ÂM. 1. Giới thiệu

C. the serious shortage. D. the demand for water. Question 39: What is the author's attitude in paragraph 3? A. concerned B. explanatory C. outraged D. emotional Question 40: Why does the author use "prefer robots" in paragraph 5? A. To show the importance of robots in production. B. To encourage the workers to resign from work. C. To compare the robots with the workers. D. To emphasize the scientist's role in inventing robots. Question 41: The word "conquered" in the last paragraph is closest in meaning to ______________. A. controlled B. diagnosed C. transmitted D. causedQuestion 42: What may NOT be true about life in 2050? A. Many forms of entertainment will come to us thanks to computer. B. Blind and deaf people will be helped by scientists to see and hear again. C. Scientists will be able to produce clones of people and decide how intelligent they are. D. Our sources of water for agriculture will increase ten times.

Mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the underlined part that needs correction in each of the following questions. Question 43: My brother is enough young to get a scholarship from the government . A B C DQuestion 44: Laura expected to give her mother a hand in housework at the weekend, but she did nothing. A B C D Question 45: It’s less expensive to buy a computer part by part; you can save a few hundred dollars all together. A B C DMark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the sentence that is closest in meaning to each of the following questions. Question 46: The living room isn’t as big as the kitchen

A. The living room is bigger than the kitchen. B. The kitchen is smaller than the living room.C. The kitchen is bigger than the living room. D. The kitchen is not bigger than the living room.

Question 47: “Why don’t you complain to the company, John?” said Peter.A. Peter asked John why he doesn’t complain to the company. B. Peter advised John complaining to the company.C. Peter suggested John to complain to the company. D. Peter suggested that John should complain to the

company.Question 48: I’m sure it wasn’t Mr. Park you saw at the conference because he is in Seoul now.

A. It can’t have been Mr. Park you saw at the conference because he is in Seoul now.B. It couldn’t be Mr. Park you saw at the conference because he is in Seoul now.C. It mustn’t have been Mr. Park you saw at the conference because he is in Seoul now.D. It mightn’t be Mr. Park you saw at the conference because he is in Seoul now.

Mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the sentence that best combines each pair of sentences in the following questions. Question 49: Susan didn’t apply for the summer job in the café. She now regrets it.

A. Susan wishes that she applied for the summer job in the café.B. Susan feels regret because she didn’t apply for the summer job in the café.C. If only Susan didn’t apply for the summer job in the café.D. Susan wishes that she had applied for the summer job in the café.

Question 50: The Prime Minister failed to explain the cause of the economic crisis, he did not offer any solutions.A. Although the Prime Minister explained the cause of the economic crisis, he failed to offer any solutions.B. Not only did the Prime Minister explain the cause of the economic crisis, but he also offered solutions.C. The Prime Minister offered some solutions based on the explanation of the cause of the economic crisis.D. The Prime Minister didn’t explain the cause of the economic crisis, nor did he offer any solutions.

-------- THE END --------

Page 117: letrungkien.edu.vnletrungkien.edu.vn/uploads/laws/tieng-anh-on-tap-thi... · Web viewPHONETICS NGỮ ÂM * PHẦN I: LÝ THUYẾT. A. PRONUNCIATION. I. NGUYÊN ÂM. 1. Giới thiệu